Gigaset Communications DX800A DECT Basestation with Bluetooth User Manual Saturn

Gigaset Communications GmbH DECT Basestation with Bluetooth Saturn

UserManual.wiki >

Gigaset Communications >

DX800A User Manual HTML Version

User Manual EN

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / Cover_front.fm /

Congratulations

By purchasing a Gigaset, you have chosen a brand that is fully committed

to sustainability. This product’s packaging is eco-friendly!

To learn more, visit www.gigaset.com.

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / Cover_front.fm /

Gigaset DX800A all in one – your perfect companion

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / introduction.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Gigaset DX800A all in one – your perfect companion

... impressive interior and exterior qualities. Go crazy for the vibrant 3.5" TFT display, first-class

sound quality and elegant exterior. Your Gigaset can do a lot more than just make calls:

DSL or DSL and analogue fixed line – easy

– Simply connect your Gigaset. It will automatically detect the networks to which it is con-

nected and adapt its configuration accordingly. It then launches the appropriate wizards for

you to set up your send and receive connections and assign the connected devices.

Bluetooth, Ethernet, DECT and FAX port

Connect your Gigaset to the Internet and your PC via Ethernet. Use your public and private

directories on the Internet (¢page 74). Update the directory on your Gigaset, the directory

on your Bluetooth mobile and your directory on the PC simultaneously.

Directory for up to 1000 vCards – calendar and appointments

Save phone numbers and other data to the local directory (¢page 69). Enter appointments

and birthdays in the calendar and set reminders (¢page 100).

Use your Gigaset as a PABX

Assign each device its own phone number.

Go online with your Gigaset

Use your phone's info centre and have information specifically provided for the phone from

the Internet shown on the display (¢page 86).

Do not disturb

Switch off the display backlight at night (¢page 119), use time control for calls

(¢page 121) or reject unknown calls (¢page 121).

Other practical information

Transfer the directory from an existing Gigaset handset (¢page 71), use the programmable

function keys (¢page 116) for quick dial or quick access to important functions, use the

convenient headset to make calls (with cord ¢page 115 or Bluetooth ¢page 112), skip

back five seconds when listening to answering machine messages to repeat the last section

(¢page 89), use your phone to read your e-mail (without a PC).

Environment

Gigaset Green Home – be environmentally aware when using your phone. For details of our

ECO DECT products, visit www.gigaset.com/service.

Gigaset DX800A all in one – your perfect companion

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / introduction.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

For more information about your phone, visit www.gigaset.com/gigasetDX800A.

After purchasing your Gigaset phone, please register it at www.gigaset.com/service –

this will ensure any questions you may have or warranty services you request are dealt with

even faster!

Have fun using your new phone!

Please note

To change the display language, proceed as follows (¢page 118):

¤Press right on the control key v.

¤Press the following keys in sequence: *#Q3#.

¤Press the control key qto move up or down until the correct language is selected.

Then press the right display key.

Base overview

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / overview.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Base overview

1Adjust volume S = quieter; R = louder

During a call/message playback: handsfree/

receiver volume;

When an external call is being signalled:

ringer volume

2Display

3Display keys (programmable; page 40,

page 116)

In the menu: open a menu for further func-

tions

4Message key (page 68)

Access to call and message lists;

Flashes: new message/call or new firmware/

new provider profile available

5End/back key (red)

End, cancel function, go back one menu level

(press briefly); back to idle status (press and

hold)

6Function keys (programmable; page 116)

7Redial

Open redial list (page 65)

8Handsfree key

9Mute key

During a call: activate/deactivate microphone

10 * key

Activate/deactivate ringer (press and hold);

Text input: special characters table

11 Back key for answering machine

During playback: back to the start of the mes-

sage/previous message

12 Playing back messages

Activate/deactivate message playback

13 On/off key for answering machine

Activate/deactivate assigned answering

machine(s) (page 90)

14 # key

For text input: switch between upper/lower

case letters and digits

15 Control key (page 39)

16 Microphone

123465

7891011 12 1314 15 16

Display icons

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / overview.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Display icons

Ã1 2 3·6:30am

Ã02

Mar 2011

8:52am

INT 1

Calls Calendar

Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su

01 02 03 04 05 06 07

08 09 10 11 12 13 14

15 16 17 18 19 20 21

22 23 24 25 26 27 28

29 30 31

Base status

(two lines)

Current month/year

Time

Internal name

ØÙÚ

Signalling:

External call

(page 52)

ØãÚ ØÃÚ

Internal call

(page 105)

Answering machine is

recording (page 89)

Ã1 2 3¼òôl ó·6:30am

Ã02 ™ 10 Ë 09 n08

ØÜ

Appointment

(page 100)/anni-

versary (page 74)

Ø¼Ú

Alarm

(page 103)

Answering machine icon

1/2/3

numbers of the activated answering machines

(orange = on)

Eco mode activated (green) (page 100)

ò:Bluetooth activated (page 108)

additionally ô if Bluetooth headset connected,

additionally l if Bluetooth GSM mobile connected

Ringer deactivated (page 121)

Replaced by ñ, when alert tone activated

Alarm clock switched on and wake-up time set (page 103)

Number of new messages:

uIn the missed alarms list (page 102)

uIn e-mail list (page 83)

uIn the missed calls list (page 68)

uOn the network mailbox (page 99)

Display in idle status (example)

Appointment entered in

the calendar (page 100)

Current date

Status display in the headers: The following icons are displayed dependent on the settings

and the operating status of your base:

Contents

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / SaturnIVZ.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Contents

Gigaset DX800A all in one – your perfect companion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Base overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Display icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

First steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Checking the package contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Setting up the base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Connecting the base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Setting up the base – installation wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Setting the date and time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Proceeding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Operating the base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Control key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Display keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Keys on the keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Correcting incorrect entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Using the menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Understanding the operating steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Menu tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Making calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Making an external call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Ending a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Accepting a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Calling Line Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Notes on calling line display (CLIP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

VoIP telephony via Gigaset.net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Gigaset HDSP – telephony with brilliant sound quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Activating/deactivating handsfree/open listening mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Muting the base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Making calls using network services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Configuring general settings for all calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Configuring settings for the next call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Configuring settings during an external call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Functions after a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Using lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Redial list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Answering machine list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Call lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Opening lists with the message key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Using directories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Contents

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / SaturnIVZ.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Using the local base directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Using online directories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Using the private net directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Using the Gigaset.net directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Making cost-effective calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Defining dialling plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Linking a number with a call-by-call number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Displaying call duration/charges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

E-mail notifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Opening the incoming e-mail list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Viewing the message header and text of an e-mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

View e-mail sender's address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Deleting e-mail messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Info centre – continuous Internet access from your phone . . . . . . . . . . 86

Starting the info centre, selecting info services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Login for personalised info services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Operating the info centre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Displaying information from the Internet as a screensaver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Operating the base's answering machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Operating via the base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Activating/deactivating call screening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Setting the recording parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Operating when on the move (remote operation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Using the network mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Network mailbox: activating/deactivating, entering numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Configuring an answering machine for quick dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

ECO DECT: Reducing energy consumption and radiation . . . . . . . . . . 100

Setting an appointment (calendar) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Displaying missed appointments, anniversaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Setting the alarm clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Connecting/using other devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Registering handsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

De-registering handsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Locating a handset (paging) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Making internal calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Changing the name of an internal party . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Changing the internal number of an internal party . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Using Bluetooth devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Connecting a fax machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Connecting and using a wire-bound headset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Setting up the base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Accessing functions and numbers quickly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Changing the display language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Contents

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / SaturnIVZ.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Setting the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Changing the handsfree/receiver volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Setting ringers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Activating/deactivating advisory tones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Activating/deactivating music on hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Resource directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Configuring the system settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Setting the date and time manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Protecting against unauthorised access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Setting your own area code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Setting the base's IP address in LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Setting up/deleting connections (MSNs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Configuring VoIP connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Assigning send and receive connections to internal parties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Updating the phone firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Activating/deactivating the DECT interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Activating/deactivating the FAX port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Restoring the base to the default settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Checking the base's MAC address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Changing the default connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Connecting the base to a PABX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Saving an access code (outside line code) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Setting pauses (fixed line) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Setting recall (fixed line) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Transferring a call – ECT (Explicit Call Transfer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Using Centrex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Selecting dialling mode/options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Industry Canada Certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

FCC / ACTA Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Service (Customer Care) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

End-user limited warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Questions and answers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

VoIP status codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Checking service information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Caring for your telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Contact with liquid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Insert strips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Writing and editing text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Using Gigaset QuickSync – additional functions via the PC interface . . . . . . . . . . 150

Using Open Source software contained in the product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Contents

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / SaturnIVZ.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

GNU General Public License (GPL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

GNU Lesser General Public License (LGPL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Safety precautions

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / security.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Safety precautions

Warning

Read the safety precautions and the user guide before use.

Explain their content and the potential hazards associated with using the telephone to your

children.

Use only the power adapter supplied, as indicated on the underside of the base.

Use only the cables supplied for fax, fixed line, LAN and receiver connection and con-

nect these to the intended port only.

Using your telephone may affect nearby medical equipment. Be aware of the

technical conditions in your particular environment e.g., doctor's surgery.

Do not install the phone in a bathroom or shower room. The phone is not splash-

proof.

Do not use your phone in environments with a potential explosion hazard

(e.g., paint shops).

If you give your phone to a third party, make sure you also give them the user guide.

Remove faulty telephones from use or have them repaired by our Service team,

as they could interfere with other wireless services.

Please note

uPlease note that only terminals that are operated in-house (inside buildings) may be con-

nected to the analogue TAE connections.

uNot all functions described in this user guide are available in all countries and with all pro-

viders.

First steps

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / starting.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

First steps

Checking the package contents

1One base

2 One receiver to be connected to the base

3 One (coiled) cable for connecting the receiver to the base

4 One power cable for connecting the base to the mains power supply

5 One phone cable for connecting the base to the (8-pin with 2 mini western jacks

8/8; the inner 4 pins are assigned and the cable slightly flattened)

6 One phone cable for connecting the base to the analogue fixed line

(TAE RJ45 8-pin; the outer 2 pins are assigned and the cable slightly flattened)

7 One cable for connecting a fax machine to the base

(6 pin with 2 mini western jacks 6/6)

8 One Ethernet (LAN) cable (Cat 5 with 2 RJ45 modular jacks) for connecting the

base to a router (LAN/Internet) or PC

9 One quick user guide

10 One CD

1 4

5 7

First steps

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / starting.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Setting up the base

The base is designed for use in dry rooms in a temperature range of +5°C to +45°C.

¤Set up the base at a central point in the building.

The phone's feet do not usually leave any marks on surfaces. However, due to the

multitude of different varnishes and polishes used on today's furnishings, the

occurrence of marks on the surfaces cannot be completely ruled out.

Firmware updates

This user guide describes the functions of your base from firmware

version 56.00.

Whenever there are new or improved functions for your Gigaset, firmware

updates are made available for you to download to your base (¢page 129).

If this results in operational changes for using your base, a new version of this

user guide or the necessary amendments will be published on the Internet at

www.gigaset.com.

Select the product to open the relevant product page for your base, where you

will find a link to the user guide.

To find out what version of firmware is currently loaded (¢page 146).

Please note

If you wish to operate handsets from the base, consider the range of the base.

This is up to 300 m in unobstructed outdoor areas and up to 50 m inside build-

ings. The range is reduced when Eco mode is activated (¢page 100).

Warning

uNever expose the telephone to any of the following: heat sources, direct sun-

light or other electrical appliances.

uProtect your Gigaset from moisture, dust, corrosive liquids and fumes.

First steps

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / starting.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Connecting the base

The following diagram is an overview of all connections for your base.

The individual connections are described in detail below. In order for you to make

calls on your phone via the fixed line and VoIP, you need to connect the base to the

fixed line and Internet (see diagram below).

Follow the steps in the order given below:

1. Connect the receiver to the base.

2 Connect the base to the telephone network (analogue fixed line or ).

3 Connect the base to the mains power supply.

4 Connect the base to the router for accessing the Internet (via router and modem

or via router with integrated modem) and for configuring the base via the

Web configurator.

5 You can connect a PC to the base via the second LAN socket LAN2 (optional) –

e.g., for connecting the PC to the router. The base takes on the task of a switch.

6 Connect the base to a fax machine (¢page 114).

7 Connect a wire-bound headset to the base.

For instructions on using the headset see page 115, page 51 and page 53.

For instructions on connecting and using a Bluetooth headset (see page 108,

page 51 and page 53).

First steps

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / starting.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

1. Connecting the receiver to the base

1. Insert the jack, which can be found on the longer straight end of the connection

cable, into the connection port marked with the ^ icon on the underside of

the base.

2 Place the straight part of the cable in the cable recess provided.

3 Insert the other jack on the connection cable into the port on the receiver.

Underside of

the base

First steps

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / starting.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

2. Connecting the base to the telephone network

1. Pass one end of the phone cable from behind through the recess in the housing.

– Use the 8-pin cable with 2 mini western jacks 8/8 if you wish to connect the

phone to the network (¢page 10, cable 5).

– Use the TAE connection cable with RJ11 plug to connect to the analogue

fixed line (¢page 10, cable 6).

2 Plug the telephone cable into the port marked with the ] icon on the under-

side of the base.

3 Then connect the telephone cable to the fixed line connection.

Underside of

the base

Your Gigaset telephone automatically detects which line it is connected to and

the installation wizard later prompts you to make all the necessary settings for

the current connection (¢page 18).

First steps

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / starting.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

3. Connecting the base to the mains power supply

1. Insert the small jack on the power cable from the rear into the recess in

the housing.

2 Plug the jack into the port marked with the \ icon on the underside of

the base.

3Then connect the power cable to the mains power supply.

Now you can make calls with your base via the fixed line, and can be reached via

your fixed line number or the main number of your connection!

An answering machine on the base is set with a pre-recorded announcement in

answer and record mode (¢page 89).

Warning

uKeep the power adapter plugged in at all times for operation, as the base

does not work without a mains connection.

uUse only the power and telephone cables supplied. Pin connections on tel-

ephone cables can vary (pin connections ¢page 149).

First steps

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / starting.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

4. Connecting the base with a router (Internet) or PC

Your base features two LAN connections, via which you can connect the base to a

router and/or PC.

Connection to a router is required for Internet telephony VoIP (Voice over Internet

Protocol). You can set up and configure up to six accounts (VoIP phone numbers)

from one or several VoIP provider(s) on the base.

Your base also needs to be connected to the router for the following features on

your phone:

uYou wish to be notified as soon as new software is available for your base on the

Internet.

uThe date and time on your base should be updated by a time server on the

Internet.

uYou want to use info services and/or online directories on your base.

The base will have to be connected to a PC (via a router or directly) if you wish to

use the following features of your base:

uYou wish to set up the base using its Web configurator.

uYou wish to use the additional PC software "Gigaset QuickSync over Ethernet"

to dial numbers via the PC (e.g., numbers from the PC directory) or to load

images or melodies from the PC to your base.

For Internet access you need a router connected to the Internet via a modem (this

may be integrated in the router).

Please note

For telephony via the Internet, you need a broadband Internet connection

(e.g., DSL) with flat rate (recommended) or volume rate and a router that

connects your phone to the Internet. You can find a list of recommended

routers on the Internet at:

www.gigaset.com/service

From here, go to the FAQ page and select your Gigaset IP telephone. Search for

"Router", for example.

First steps

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / starting.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

1. Guide the end of the Ethernet cable provided (Cat 5 with 2 RJ45 modular jacks)

from the rear through the recess in the housing.

2 Plug the jack on the Ethernet cable into the LAN port on the underside of

the base.

3 Then insert the second Ethernet cable jack into a LAN port on the router or PC..

You are now able to establish VoIP connections within Gigaset.net

(¢page 56).

Data protection notice

When the device is connected to the router, it automatically contacts the

Gigaset support server to make it easier for you to configure the devices and to

enable communication with the Internet services.

For this purpose, every device sends the following device-specific information

once every day:

uSerial number/item number

uMAC address

uPrivate IP address for the Gigaset in the LAN/its port numbers

uDevice name

uSoftware version

On the support server, this information is linked to the existing device-specific

information:

uGigaset.net phone number

uSystem-related/device-specific passwords

Further information about the Gigaset.net service data saved can be found at

www.gigaset.net/privacy-policy

First steps

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / starting.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Setting up the base – installation wizard

As soon as the phone is connected to the mains power supply, the firmware is

started. The telephone checks which telephone connections it is connected to.

If no connections have been generated on the base yet, the installation wizard

starts. The wizard allows you to make all necessary settings for your phone.

The following message appears in the display.

Several individual wizards are combined to form the installation wizard. The indi-

vidual wizards that start on your device depend on the type of your device and the

connections to which the device is connected. The following individual wizards are

included in the installation wizard:

1IP wizard

2 Registration wizard

3 Connection wizard

¤Press the display key §Yes§ to start

installation.

Setup - Welcome

Would you like help

setting up

your phone?

No Yes

Please note

uThe installation wizard only starts if no connection has been configured on

the base yet. If connections have already been configured, you can start the

IP and wizards (individually) via the menu, if necessary.

uUse only the installation wizard on the base, but not on a registered handset.

First steps

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / starting.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Please note:

uIf the installation wizard is activated, no other handset can access the Settings

menu on the base.

uTo quit the installation wizard before the process is complete, press and hold the

red end key T. All changes you have already saved using §OK§ are retained.

uTo skip a setting, press left on the control key u or the display key §No§.

Connection Procedure

For connection to VoIP 2. IP wizard

3. Registration wizard

4. Connection wizard

Then: installation complete

For connection to the analogue

fixed line and VoIP

2. IP wizard

3. Registration wizard

4. Connection wizard

Then: installation complete

First steps

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / starting.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

1. wizard: Assigning/entering the connection's MSNs

Prerequisite: You have connected the base to the telephone network.

Several numbers (MSNs) were provided by the network provider when you

received your connection confirmation. You can save up to ten numbers (MSNs) on

your base. If there is no MSN entered on your base, you can do the following with

the wizard:

uAssign the MSNs for your connection i.e., call them up from the exchange (auto-

matic MSN assignment) or enter them manually.

Please note:

Not every provider supports automatic MSN assignment. If this feature is not

supported, then you must enter the MSNs for your connection manually.

uSet the receive MSN.

uSet the send MSN.

¤Press the display key §Yes§ to start the

installation.

¤Press the display key §OK§ to start

automatic MSN assignment. This

process will take some time.

Detecting your ISDN phone num-

bers (MSNs)... is displayed on the

screen.

ISDN Wizard

Start ISDN

installation wizard?

No Yes

ISDN Wizard Ð

This wizard helps you

detect and configure

your ISDN phone

numbers (MSNs).

First steps

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / starting.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

If no MSNs were detected, No MSNs detected. is displayed. You are prompted to

enter your MSNs manually:

After the MSNs have been successfully

assigned, a list containing the MSNs is

displayed.

¤Press the display key §OK§ to close

the wizard.

The display shows ISDN installation

complete..

ISDN Wizard Ð

MSN Assignment

MSN1: 12345601

MSN2: 12345602

MSN3: 12345603

MSN4: 12345604

Change OK

Please note

You can change the names of the MSNs (¢page 126).

¤Press the display key §OK§ to enter the

MSNs manually.

¤Enter a name for MSN 1 via the

number keys (max. 16 characters).

If you do not enter anything, MSN1

is set.

¤Press down on the control key s to

switch to entering the MSN number.

ISDN Wizard

Please enter your

MSN data.

Back OK

Configure MSNs

MSN - Name:

MSN - Number:

Abc V

< C Save

First steps

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / starting.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

The display shows ISDN installation complete..

¤Enter your first MSN (without area

code; max. 20 digits).

¤Press down on the control key again

to switch to the next field.

¤Repeat the above procedure to

enter the remaining MSNs.

¤After entering the final MSN:

press the display key §Save§.

Configure MSNs

MSN - Name: W

MSN - Number:

123456|

MSN - Name: V

< C Save

First steps

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / starting.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

2. IP wizard: Making VoIP settings

You will see the following display:

Before you can use the Internet (VoIP) to phone any other numbers on the Internet,

the fixed line or the mobile network, you need the services of a VoIP provider who

supports the VoIP SIP standard.

Prerequisite: You have registered with a VoIP provider (e.g., via your PC) and set up

at least one VoIP account (IP account).

To use VoIP, you now need to enter the access data for your VoIP account. You will

receive all the necessary data from your VoIP provider. This will include:

Your Gigaset phone's IP wizard can help you make these entries.

Either:

uYour user name

(if required by the VoIP provider).

This is the user name of your IP

account (caller ID), frequently identi-

cal to your phone number.

uYour authentication name or

uThe (login) password registered with

the VoIP provider

uGeneral settings for your VoIP pro-

vider (server addresses etc.)

Or:

uAn auto configuration code

(activation code)

Please note

You can configure up to six VoIP connections. In the phone setup process

(no VoIP connection has been configured yet), you configure one VoIP connec-

tion. You can configure additional VoIP connections later with the IP wizard

(¢page 127) or Web configurator.

IP Wizard

Start IP

installation wizard?

No Yes

First steps

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / starting.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Starting the IP wizard

Prerequisite: The base is connected to the router. Your router is connected to the

Internet (¢page 16).

¤Press on the centre of the control key w or on the right display key §Yes§ to start

the IP wizard.

Information about the IP wizard

appears in the display.

¤Press the bottom of the control

key s to scroll down.

¤Press the §OK§ display key to con-

tinue.

A list of all possible IP connections is

shown in the display (IP 1 to IP 6).

VoIP connections that are already

configured are marked with ³.

¤If necessary, press down on the con-

trol key s to select a connection.

¤Press the §OK§ display key to con-

tinue.

IP WizardÐ

This wizard helps you

configure an IP

account and register

it with your provider

so you can make calls V

Select IP Account

IP 1 ´

IP 2 ´

IP 3 ´

IP 4 ´

IP 5 ´V

Back OK

First steps

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / starting.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

You will see the following display:

Your VoIP provider has supplied you

with an authentication name/pass-

word and, where applicable, a user

name:

¤Press the key below §No§ on the dis-

play screen.

¤For further information, please see

"Downloading VoIP provider data"

(¢page 27).

You have received an auto-configura-

tion code (activation code) from your

VoIP provider:

¤Press the key below §Yes§ on the

display screen.

¤For further information, please see

"Entering the auto configuration

code" (¢page 26).

IP Wizard

Do you have a code

for Auto

Configuration?

No Yes

First steps

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / starting.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Entering the auto configuration code

All data necessary for VoIP telephony is loaded directly from the Internet to your

phone.

When all the data has been successfully loaded onto your phone, Your IP account

is registered with your provider appears on the display.

¤For further information, please see "3. Registration wizard" (page 30).

No Internet connection:

The phone requires an Internet connection for you to register your telephone

with a VoIP provider. If a connection cannot be made, one of the following mes-

sages is displayed:

uIf the phone cannot establish a connection to the router, the message

IP address not available. is displayed.

Check the plug connection between the router and the base and check the

settings on the router.

Your phone is preconfigured for dynamic assignment of the IP address.

In order for your router to "recognise" the phone, dynamic IP address assign-

ment must also be activated on the router i.e., the router's DHCP server must

be activated.

If the DHCP server cannot or should not be activated, you must assign a fixed

IP address to the phone (¢page 125).

uIf the phone cannot establish a connection to the Internet, the message

Internet connection not available. is displayed.

The IP server may be temporarily unavailable. In this case, try to make a con-

nection again later.

Otherwise: check the plug connection between the router and the modem

or DSL connection and check the settings on the router.

¤Press §OK§; the IP wizard is closed.

You will then need to call up the wizard later via the menu to configure the

IP connection.

¤Using the keypad, enter the auto

configuration code you received

from the provider (max. 32 charac-

ters).

¤Press the key below §OK§ on the

display screen.

IP Wizard

Activation code for

Auto Configuration:

< C OK

First steps

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / starting.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Downloading VoIP provider data

The connection wizard establishes a connection with the Gigaset configuration

server on the Internet. Various profiles with general access data for different VoIP

providers can be downloaded here.

After a brief period you will see the following display:

The general access data for your VoIP provider will be downloaded and saved on

the phone.

A list of countries is loaded.

¤Press up or down on the control key

repeatedly until the country in

which you wish to use the phone is

selected in the display.

¤Press the key below §OK§ on the

display screen to confirm your selec-

tion.

A list of the VoIP providers for which a

profile with the general access data is

available on the configuration server is

displayed.

¤Press up or down on the control

key qrepeatedly until your VoIP

provider is selected in the display.

¤Press the key below §OK§ on the

display screen to confirm your selec-

tion.

Select your country

Country 1

Country 2

Country 3

Country 4

Country 5 V

Back OK

Select your Provider

Provider 1

Provider 2

Provider 3

Provider 4

Provider 5 V

Back OK

You have not been able to download your provider's data

If your VoIP provider does not appear in the list, i.e., its general data is not pro-

vided for download, you must cancel the IP wizard:

¤Briefly press the red end key T repeatedly until Start IP installation wiz-

ard? appears in the display again, and then on the display key §No§.

You can perform the subsequent steps of the installation wizard.

You must then make the required VoIP provider and IP account settings

using the Web configurator. You receive the general provider data from your

VoIP provider.

You can change the assignment of the VoIP connection as send/receive connec-

tion at a later time via the telephone menu or the Web configurator.

First steps

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / starting.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Entering user data for your VoIP account

You are now prompted to enter your personal access data for your VoIP account.

The following are provider-dependent:

u User Name, Authentication Name, Authentication Password

Please note ...

... when entering access data, it is case sensitive.

To switch between upper and lower case and digits, press the # key (several

times if necessary). You can see briefly in the display whether upper case, lower

case or digit input is selected.

Characters entered incorrectly can be deleted using the left display key

below Ñ. The character to the left of the cursor is deleted.

You can navigate within the input field using the control key r (left/right).

¤Using the keypad, enter the authen-

tication name that you received

from your VoIP provider.

¤Press the key under §OK§ on the

display screen.

¤Use the keypad to enter your pass-

word.

¤Press the key under §OK§ on the

display screen.

Provider Data

Authentication Name:

Abc

< C OK

Provider Data

Authentication

Password:

Abc

< C OK

First steps

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / starting.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

After successful registration, the message "Your IP account is registered with your

provider" appears in the display.

The registration wizard starts.

Now you can make calls with your phone over the Internet as well as the

fixed line or (dependent on the selected connection)! You can be

reached via your VoIP number and your fixed line number or the MSN of

your connection!

¤Using the keypad, enter the user

name that you received from your

VoIP provider.

¤Press the key under §OK§ on the

display screen.

Once you have made all the necessary

entries, the IP wizard will try to register

the base with the VoIP provider.

Provider Data

User Name:

Abc

< C OK

IP Wizard

Registering at

provider...

First steps

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / starting.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

3. Registration wizard

The registration wizard helps you register handsets to the base.

If the handset has been successfully registered on the base, you will see the follow-

ing display (for approx. three seconds):

Then "Register a handset?" is shown in the display again (see above/page 30).

¤Press the display key §Yes§ if you wish to register another handset and perform

the steps listed above with this additional handset.

Press §No§ to close the registration wizard and start the connection wizard.

Please note

Press the left display key §No§, if you do

not wish to register any handsets.

This closes the registration wizard

and the connection wizard is started

(¢page 31).

To register handsets on the base at a

later stage (¢page 104).

¤Press the display key §Yes§. The base

changes to registration mode.

Registration

handset?

No Yes

¤Start the registration on the hand-

set within approx. 60 seconds

according to the handset's user

guide.

Info

Press the display key §Info§ to display

information about registering hand-

sets.

Registration

Please register

your handset

Cancel Info

Once a Gigaset handset has been suc-

cessfully registered, it will change to

idle status. The handset's internal name

is shown on the display (INT 2, INT 3

to INT 7).

Registration

‰

Handset registered

First steps

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / starting.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

4. Connection wizard

The connection wizard enables you to assign previously configured connections

(fixed line connection, MSNs, Gigaset.net and VoIP connections, ¢page 20,

page 55 and page 23) to internal parties as receive and, if applicable, as send con-

nections. Internal parties are the base, registered handsets, the answering machine

for the base as well as any FAX machine that might be connected (¢page 114).

uReceive connections are numbers (connections, MSNs) on which you can be

called. Incoming calls are only forwarded to the internal parties (end devices) for

which the relevant connection is assigned as receive connection.

uSend connections are the numbers that are sent to the called party. The net-

work provider calculates charges based on the send connections. You can assign

each internal party a number or the associated connection as a permanent send

connection.

uEach connection (number) of your phone can be both a send as well as a receive

connection. You can assign each connection to several internal parties as send

and/or receive connection. It may only be assigned to an answering machine as

a receive connection.

Default assignment

All configured connections are assigned as receive connections to the base, the

registered handsets and the local answering machine 1 at registration/start-up.

When the phone is connected to the , the first MSN in the configuration (standard

name MSN1) is assigned to the devices as send connection.

When the phone is connected to the analogue fixed line, the devices are assigned

the fixed line number as the send connection.

Please note

uBy default, the base is assigned the internal name INT 1 and the internal

number 1.

uThe base assigns the lowest free internal number to the handset

(possible numbers: 2–7). The handset's internal name is shown in the display

e.g., INT 2. This means that the handset has been assigned the internal

number 2.

uYou can change the internal numbers and names later (¢page 105).

First steps

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / starting.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Starting the connection wizard

¤Press the display key §Yes§ if you

wish to change the setting for the

send and receive connections of

the base (internal name INT 1).

¤Press the display key §No§ if you do

not wish to change the setting for

the base.

b. (Display for connection)

Or:

(Display for fixed line connection)

The list of receive connections cur-

rently assigned is displayed.

Press down on the control key s to

scroll through the list if necessary.

¤Press the display key §Change§ if you

wish to change the receive connec-

tion setting for the base.

¤Press the display key §OK§ if you do

not wish to change the setting.

Connection Wizard

Assign connections

to desk phone

INT 1?

No Yes

Receive ConnectionsÐ

INT 1

receives calls for

MSN1: 12345601

MSN2: 12345602

MSN3: 12345603 V

Change OK

Receive ConnectionsÐ

INT 1

receives calls for

Fixed Line: 4560123

IP1: 12345602

Gigaset.net: 12345#9 V

Change OK

First steps

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / starting.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Press §OK§ to skip the following steps. Continue from £e.

Press §Change§ to display the following:

c. (Display for connection)

Or:

(Display for fixed line connection)

If you do not want calls to MSN1 or

your fixed line number signalled on

the base:

¤Press right on the control key v to

set to No.

INT 1

Receive Calls for

MSN1:

fYe s g

Receive Calls for

MSN2: V

Back Save

INT 1

Receive Calls for

Fixed Line:

fYe s g

Receive Calls for

IP1: V

Back Save

First steps

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / starting.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

d. (Display for connection)

Or:

(Display for fixed line connection)

¤Press down on the control key s

to switch to the next number.

Select either Yes or No as described

above.

¤Repeat the steps for each number.

¤Press the display key §Save§ once

you have finished configuring the

settings for the base.

The updated list of receive connections is displayed one more time for you to

check.

Press the display key §OK§ to confirm the assignment.

e. The send connection currently set for

the base is displayed: MSN1 for con-

nection to the and Fixed Line for con-

nection to the analogue fixed line.

¤Press the display key §OK§ if you do

not wish to change the setting.

Skip the following step.

¤To change the setting, press the

display key §Change§.

INT 1

MSN1: W

Receive Calls for

MSN2:

fYe s gV

Back Save

INT 1

Fixed Line: W

Receive Calls for

IP1:

fYe s gV

Back Save

Send ConnectionÐ

INT 1

sends calls with

MSN1:

12345601

Change OK

First steps

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / starting.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

If handsets are already registered to the base, you are requested to assign send and

receive connections for the handsets. The following is shown in the display:

Assign connections to handset INT ...?

¤Perform steps a. to f. for each registered handset.

You are then requested to assign the receive connections to the three answering

machines on the base. "Assign connections to answering machine ?" is shown in

the display.

¤Perform steps a. to d. for each answering machine.

Please note: Each connection may only be assigned to one of the three local

answering machines as a receive connection. If you assign a receive connection to

an answering machine and this connection is already assigned to another answer-

ing machine, the "old" assignment is deleted.

After successfully configuring the settings, you will briefly see the following display:

f. If the base is to make calls via a differ-

ent connection/phone number:

¤Press right on the control key v

repeatedly, until the required con-

nection is displayed (in the exam-

ple, IP1).

¤Press the display key §Save§ to save

the settings.

INT 1

Connection for

outgoing calls

fIP1 g

Back Save

Connection Wizard

‰

Connection

assignment

complete.

First steps

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / starting.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Completing the installation

This completes the installation. The following is shown in the display:

Afterwards, the base returns to idle status (for an example of the display in idle sta-

tus ¢page 4).

The answering machines of the base to which you assigned a receive connection

are activated and switched on in answer and record mode with a standard

announcement (¢page 89).

Setup

‰

Setup

complete.

Please note

To protect your phone and its system settings from unauthorised access, please

define a 4-digit number code (system PIN) known only to yourself. This code

must be entered before you can register/de-register handsets or alter your

phone's VoIP or LAN settings.

The default system PIN is 0000 (4 x zero). For instructions on changing the PIN

(¢page 124).

First steps

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / starting.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Setting the date and time

There are three methods of setting the date and time:

uThe base updates the date and time from the network the first time you make an

outgoing, external call.

uYou can configure your base so that once the base is connected to the Internet,

the date and time is transferred from a time server.

You can activate/deactivate the synchronisation with a time server via the Web

configurator. Detailed information can be found in the Web configurator's user

guide on the enclosed CD.

uYou can set the date and time manually via the base menu or one of the regis-

tered handsets (¢page 123).

To ensure you have the correct time for incoming calls and to use the alarm clock

and calendar, the date and time must be set.

Setting the date and time manually

If the date and time have not been set, the time will flash in the base's idle display

(00:00) and §Time§ is displayed above the right display key.

¤Press the key under §Time§ on the display screen.

Enter day, month and year as an 8-digit number via the keypad,

e.g., QM42Q for 07.14.2011. This overwrites the dis-

played date.

¤Press down on control key s to scroll to the time entry line.

¤Enter the hours and minutes in 4-digit format via the keypad,

e.g., QM5for 07:15 am.

¤Press the display key §Save§ to save the settings.

Calls Time

First steps

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / starting.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Proceeding

Now you have successfully set up your base, you will certainly want to adapt it to

your personal requirements. Use the following guide to quickly locate the most

important subjects.

If you are unfamiliar with menu-driven devices such as other Gigaset telephones,

read the section entitled "Operating the base" (¢page 39) first.

If you have any questions about using your phone, please read the tips

on troubleshooting (¢page 142) or contact our Customer Care team

(¢page 142).

Information on ... ... is located here.

Making external calls and accepting calls page 49

Setting the ringer melody and volume page 120

Setting the receiver volume page 119

Storing your own area code in the telephone page 124

Setting Eco mode page 100

Operating the base on a PABX page 133

Registering existing Gigaset handsets to the base page 104

Transferring directory entries from existing

Gigaset handsets to the base

page 71

Using online directories page 74

Entering additional VoIP accounts page 127

Operating the base

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / starting.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Operating the base

Control key

Below, the side of the control key that you must press in the

respective operating situation is marked in black (top, bottom,

right, left, centre) e.g., v for "press right on the control key" or

w for "press the centre of the control key".

The control key has a number of different functions:

In idle status

s Open the local directory (press briefly).

Open the list of online directories (press and hold).

v Open the main menu.

u Open the list of internal parties (handsets, base) (press briefly).

Start a group call to all internal parties (press and hold).

tOpen the call list.

In the main menu, in submenus and lists

t / s Scroll up/down line by line.

In input fields

Use the control key to move the cursor up t, down s, right v or left u.

Press and hold v or u to move the cursor word by word.

During an external call

s Open the directory.

u Initiate an internal consultation call.

Functions when pressing the middle of the control key

Depending on the operating situation, the key has different functions.

uIn idle status the key opens the main menu.

uIn submenus, selection and input fields, the key takes on the function of the

display keys §OK§, §Yes§, §Save§, §Select§, §View§ or §Change§.

Please note

In these instructions, functions are explained using the right side of the control

key and the display keys. However, if you prefer, you can use the control key as

described above.

Operating the base

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / starting.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Display keys

The functions of the display keys change depending on the particular operating sit-

uation. Example:

Some important display keys:

Open a menu for further functions.

Confirm selection.

Delete key: Delete character by character/word by word from right to

left.

Go back one menu level or cancel operation.

Save entry.

You can set the functions of the keys in idle status individually (¢page 116).

Keys on the keypad

c / Q / * etc.

Press the matching key on the handset.

~Enter digits or letters.

Correcting incorrect entries

You can correct incorrect characters in the input fields by navigating to the incor-

rect entry using the control key. You can then:

uDelete the character to the left of the cursor with the display key Ñ (press and

hold to delete the word)

uInsert characters to the left of the cursor

uOverwrite the highlighted (flashing) character e.g., when entering time and date

Current display key functions

Display keys

Back OK

Options

Back

Save

Operating the base

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / starting.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Using the menus

You can access your base's functions using a menu that has a number of levels.

Main menu (first menu level)

¤When the handset is in idle status, press the right control key v to open the

main menu.

The main menu functions are shown in the display

as icons. The selected function is marked by an

orange circle around the icon and the correspond-

ing name is shown in the display header.

To access a function i.e., to open the correspond-

ing submenu (next menu level):

¤Use the control key p to select the required

function and press the display key §OK§.

Briefly press the display key §Back§ or the red end

key T to revert to idle status.

Submenus

The functions in the submenus are displayed as

lists (example on the right).

To access a function:

¤Scroll to a function using the control key q

and then press §OK§ or the middle of the con-

trol key.

Press the display key §Back§ or briefly press the

red end key T to return to the previous

menu level/cancel the operation.

If it is not possible to view all of the functions/list entries at the same time on

the display (list is too long), arrows appear on the right-hand side of the screen.

The arrows indicate the direction in which you need to scroll to view the rest of the

entries in the list (in the example: x to scroll down).

Reverting to idle status

You can revert to idle status from anywhere in the menu as follows:

¤Press and hold the red end key T.

Or:

¤Do not press any key: After 2 minutes the display will automatically revert to idle

status.

Settings that have not been saved by selecting the display keys §OK§, §Yes§, §Save§ or

§Change§ are lost.

An example of the display in idle status is shown on page 4.

Settings

ÇòÉ

ÊËÌ

ÍÎÏ

Back OK

Settings

Connection Wizard

Date/Time

Audio Settings

Display

Language x

Back OK

Operating the base

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / starting.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Understanding the operating steps

The operating steps are shown in abbreviated form.

Example:

The display:

v ¢Ï Settings ¢Audio Settings ¢Music on Hold (³=on)

means:

¤Press right on the control key v to

open the main menu.

¤Press right, left, down and up on the

control key p to navigate to the

Settings submenu.

¤Press the display key §OK§ to confirm

your selection.

¤Press down on the control key s

until the Audio Settings menu

option appears on the display.

¤Press the display key §OK§ to confirm

your selection.

Settings

ÇòÉ

ÊËÌ

ÍÎÏ

Back OK

Settings

Connection Wizard

Date/Time

Audio Settings

Display

Language

Back OK

Operating the base

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / starting.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

¤Press down on the control key s

until the Music on Hold function

appears on the display.

¤Press the display key §Change§ to acti-

vate/deactivate the function.

The change is effective immediately

and does not need to be confirmed.

¤Press the display key §Back§ to jump

back to the previous menu level.

Press and hold the red end key T

to return to idle status.

Audio Settings

Call Volume

Ringer Settings

Advisory Tones

Music on Hold ³

Back Change

Audio Settings

Call Volume

Ringer Settings

Advisory Tones

Music on Hold ´

Back Change

Menu tree

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / menutree.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Menu tree

Please note

Different functions are offered on your base depending on the connection type (Internet

and analogue fixed line or Internet and ).

Functions that are only displayed when the phone is connected to the analogue fixed line

are marked with "Fixed line connection only".

To open the main menu: Press v when the base is in idle status.

Ç Select Services

Next Call Withhold Number connection only ¢page 61

Call Waiting Fixed line connection only

Keypad Control connection only ¢page 61

Call Divert Internal Line connection only ¢page 59

Fixed Line Fixed line connection only ¢page 58

MSN1 ¢page 58

MSN2 MSN1 to MSN10 connection

only

MSN10

IP1

IP2

IP6

Call Waiting connection only ¢page 59

Block No. All Calls ¢page 58

Unknown Call Reject. Fixed line connection only ¢page 60

Busy on Busy ¢page 60

Transfer (ECT) ¢page 60

Ringback Off ¢page 64

Menu tree

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / menutree.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

òBluetooth ¢page 108

Activation

Search for Headset

Search for Cell Phone

Search for Data

Device

Known Devices

Own Device

ÉAdditional Features

Info Center ¢page 86

Resource Directory Screensavers ¢page 122

Caller Pictures

Sounds

Capacity

ÊCall Lists ¢page 65

All Calls

Outgoing Calls

Accepted Calls

Missed Calls

ËMessaging

E-mail ¢page 83

ÌVoice Mail ¢page 89

Play Messages Net AM: Fixed Line Fixed line connection only ¢page 97

Net AM: ISDN connection only ¢page 97

Net AM: IP1

Net AM: IP2

Net AM: IP6

Answer Machine 1 ¢page 92

Answer Machine 2

Answer Machine 3

Activation Answer Machine 1 ¢page 90

Answer Machine 2

Answer Machine 3

Menu tree

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / menutree.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Announcements Record Announcemnt. Answer Machine 1 to 3 ¢page 91

Play Announcement Answer Machine 1 to 3

Delete Announcemnt. Answer Machine 1 to 3

Record Advisory Msg. Answer Machine 1 to 3

Play Advisory Message Answer Machine 1 to 3

Delete Advisory Msg. Answer Machine 1 to 3

Recordings ¢page 94

Call Screening Desktop Phone ¢page 94

Handset

Network Mailboxes Net AM: ISDN connection only ¢page 97

Net AM: Fixed Line Fixed line connection only ¢page 97

Net AM: IP1

Net AM: IP2

Net AM: IP6

Set Key 1 Net AM: Fixed Line Fixed line connection only ¢page 98

Net AM: ISDN connection only ¢page 98

Net AM: IP1

Net AM: IP2

Net AM: IP6

Answering Machine

ÍOrganizer

Calendar ¢page 100

Alarm Clock ¢page 103

Missed Alarms ¢page 102

ÎContacts

Directory ¢page 69

Network Directory Gigaset.net

Online Directory The online directories availa-

ble are displayed with pro-

vider-specific names

¢page 74

Yellow Pages ¢page 74

Prv.NetDir ¢page 77

Menu tree

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / menutree.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

ÏSettings

Connection Wizard ISDN connection only ¢page 126

VoIP ¢page 127

VoIP Wizard Fixed line connection only ¢page 127

Date/Time ¢page 123

Audio Settings Call Volume ¢page 119

Ringer Settings Volume ¢page 120

Melodies

Time Control

Anon. Call Silencing

Advisory Tones ¢page 122

Music on Hold ¢page 122

Display Screensaver ¢page 118

Info Ticker

Backlight

Language ¢page 118

Registration Register Handset ¢page 104

De-register Handset ¢page 105

Telephony Area Codes ¢page 124

Send Connections INT 1 ... INT 8 ¢page 128

Receive Connections INT 1 ... INT 8 ¢page 128

Answer Machine 1 ...

Answer Machine 3 ¢page 89

Dialing Mode Auto. Tone Dial ¢page 135

( connection only) Auto. Keypad

Dial of * and #

Flash Duration Fixed line connection only ¢page 134

Access Code ¢page 133

}

Menu tree

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / menutree.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

System Reset ¢page 131

DECT Interface ¢page 130

FAX Port ¢page 130

Local Network ¢page 125

Update Firmware ¢page 129

System PIN ¢page 124

Eco mode Eco mode ¢page 100

Making calls

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / telephony.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Making calls

If the display backlight is deactivated

(¢page 119), it can be reactivated by

pressing any key.

Making an external call

External calls are calls made via the public

telephone network (fixed line, mobile net-

work) or via the Internet (VoIP).

To make an external call, you need to define

one of the base connections as a send con-

nection. You have the following options:

uAssign a connection to the base/handset

as a send connection permanently

(¢page 128).

You can use an "alternative connection"

via the display key or function key

(¢page 116).

uSelect a send connection on the base/

handset each time you make a call.

Permanently assigned send

connection

Prerequisite:

A connection (fixed line connection, MSN of

the connection, VoIP connection) is perma-

nently assigned to the base as a send con-

nection (¢page 128).

~c Enter the number and pick up

the receiver. The number is

dialled.

Or:

c~ Pick up the receiver and enter

the number. The number is

dialled approximately

3.5 seconds after the last digit is

entered.

Instead of picking up the receiver, you can

also press the handsfree key dor the

Headset (¢page 116) function key to

make a call using the handsfree function or

headset.

In this user guide, each of these variants is

indicated by "c Pick up receiver".

The dialled number and the send connec-

tion used are shown in the display (e.g., via

IP2). The connection name you have

assigned is displayed where available.

Otherwise, the standard name is used.

Please note

You can make up to four external calls at

the same time via your base.

Please note

uIf a dialling plan has been defined for

the dialled phone number (see Web

configurator), then the connection

specified in the dialling plan will be

used to establish the connection

instead of the send connection. If the

phone number is blocked by a dial-

ling plan, it will not be dialled. Not

possible is displayed.

uIf you use VoIP to make a call to the

fixed line, you may also have to dial

the area code for local calls (depend-

ing on the provider). You can avoid

having to dial your own area code by

entering it in the configuration and

activating the Predial area code for

local calls via VoIP option.

uYou have activated the Automatic

Fallback to Fixed Line option with

the Web configurator. If an attempt to

make a call via a VoIP connection fails,

the phone automatically attempts to

establish the connection via the (first

MSN) or fixed line.

uThe base automatically dials

Gigaset.net numbers ending with the

suffix #9 via the Gigaset.net connec-

tion. The calls are free of charge

(¢page 55).

Making calls

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / telephony.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Selecting a connection at each call

Requirement: "Select at each call" has been

assigned to the base instead of a send con-

nection (¢page 128).

~c Enter the number and pick up

the receiver. The list of all the

base's connections is displayed.

qSelect a connection.

§Dial§ / wPress the display key or the mid-

dle of the control key.

If a dialling plan has been defined for the

dialled phone number (see Web configura-

tor), then the send connection specified in

the dialling plan is used.

Using an alternative connection/

connection list on the display/function

key

Prerequisite: You have assigned an "alterna-

tive connection" or the list with all config-

ured connections to a display key or func-

tion key (¢page 116).

§Sel. Line§ Press the display or function

key.

qSelect a line.

c / §Dial§ Pick up the receiver or press the

display key.

Press §Dial§ to activate handsfree

mode on the base (open listen-

ing; ¢page 56).

~ Enter a number. The number is

dialled approximately

3.5 seconds after the last digit is

entered.

Any dialling plan that has been defined for

the dialled phone number (see Web config-

urator) is ignored. The selected send con-

nection is always used.

Calling an IP address

(provider-dependent)

You can also dial an IP address instead of a

phone number using VoIP.

¤Press the star key * to separate the sec-

tions of the IP address

(e.g., 149*246*122*28).

¤If necessary, press the hash #key to

attach the SIP port number of the person

you are calling to the IP address (e.g.,

149*246*122*28#5060).

If your VoIP provider does not support the

choice of IP addresses, each part of the

address will be interpreted as a normal

phone number.

Dialling emergency numbers

Dialling plans for emergency numbers

(e.g., the local police emergency number)

are preset on the base for certain countries.

Emergency calls are then always made via

the fixed line.

However, you can change the connection

through which each emergency number

should be called (e.g., if the phone is not

connected to the fixed line). You must make

sure, however, that the VoIP provider for the

selected connection supports emergency

numbers. If the VoIP connection is deleted

from the configuration, the emergency call

can no longer be made.

Please note

uYou can use the red end key T to

cancel the dialling operation.

uYou are shown the duration of the call

while the call is in progress.

uIf the call costs are to be transferred,

these are displayed instead of the call

duration for calls made via the con-

nection.

uDialling with the directory (page 69)

or call and redial list (page 65) saves

you from repeatedly keying in phone

numbers.

uIf you have handsets registered to the

base, you can make internal calls free

of charge (page 105).

Making calls

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / telephony.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

If no dialling plans for emergency numbers

are preset on your telephone, you should set

dialling plans yourself. Assign them to a con-

nection that you know supports emergency

numbers. Calls to emergency numbers are

always supported by fixed lines.

Please note: If no dialling plans are defined

for emergency numbers and you have pro-

grammed an automatic local area code, the

code will also be prefixed to emergency

numbers as soon as they are dialled via a

VoIP connection.

Continuing a call on a headset

Prerequisite: You have assigned the Head-

set function to a function key on the base

before connecting the headset

(¢page 116).

Bluetooth headset:

Prerequisite: Bluetooth is activated; a con-

nection has been established between the

Bluetooth headset and the base

(¢page 108).

¤Press the Headset function key on the

base.

It can take up to five seconds to establish a

connection between the base and a head-

set.

For further information about Bluetooth

headsets see page 112.

Wire-bound headsets:

Prerequisite: The headset is connected to

the base (¢page 12).

¤Press the Headset function key on the

base.

For more information about wire-bound

headsets see page 115.

Making calls via your mobile

connection (Link2mobile)

You can make calls from the base via the

GSM mobile connection on your Bluetooth

mobile.

Prerequisites:

You can make a call via the GSM connection

in the same way as any other send connec-

tion on the base ( ¢Permanently assigned

send connection on page 49, Selecting a

connection at each call on page 50 and

Using an alternative connection/connec-

tion list on the display/function key on

page 50).

Recommendation

We recommend you assign the Headset

function to a function key on the

base (¢page 116) and use this func-

tion key to accept/transfer calls – even if

your headset has a push-to-talk key.

Please note

If both a Bluetooth headset and a wire-

bound headset are connected to

the base, the call is transferred to the

Bluetooth headset.

uYour GSM mobile is registered to the base

(¢page 113).

uThe mobile is within range of the base

(less than 10 m) and has a Bluetooth con-

nection to the base.

uThe base is able to use the mobile con-

nection as a send connection, i.e., the

GSM connection is assigned to the base

as send connection or the base can select

the GSM connection as the send connec-

tion (¢page 128).

Please note

A call is cancelled as soon as the mobile is

outside the range of the base (about

10 m) or Bluetooth is deactivated.

Making calls

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / telephony.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Displaying the phone number you

are calling (COLP)

Prerequisites:

uYour network provider supports COLP

(Connected Line Identification Presenta-

tion). You may need to activate COLP with

the provider (ask your provider about

this).

uThe called party has not activated COLR

(Connected Line Identification Restric-

tion).

For outgoing calls, the phone number of the

connection on which the call is received is

displayed on the base.

The displayed number may differ from the

number you have dialled. Examples:

uThe called party has activated call divert.

uThe call is answered by another connec-

tion within a PABX system.

If there is an entry in the directory for this

phone number, the corresponding name

will be displayed.

Ending a call

&Replace the receiver or press the

red end key T.

Or if you are making the call with a headset:

¤Press the Headset function key or red

end key Ton the base.

Accepting a call

An incoming call is signalled in three ways:

by ringing, by a display on the screen and by

the flashing handsfree key d.

Accept the call by:

¤Picking up the receiver.

¤Pressing the handsfree key d.

¤Pressing the display key Ô to divert

the call to the answering machine.

¤Select §Options§ ¢ Divert to AM to divert

the call to the answering machine

(¢page 93). If the receive connection is

assigned to an answering machine and

that answering machine is not busy with

another call:

– For calls to one of your VoIP connec-

tions:

Select §Options§ ¢ Divert to AM to

divert the call to the answering

machine (¢page 93).

– For calls to your fixed line connection:

Press the display key Ô to divert

the call to the answering machine.

Please note

uThe actual number of the connection

you have reached (or the assigned

name) is displayed instead of the

called number during call swapping,

conference calls and consultation

calls.

uWhen the phone number is copied to

the directory and the redial list, the

dialled number (not the displayed

number) is copied.

Please note

Only calls to the receive connections

assigned to the base are signalled

(¢page 128).

The following applies in particular if

MSNs or VoIP connections are configured

on your base:

uIf you have not assigned the receive

connections on your base, all incom-

ing calls are signalled on the base and

all handsets.

uIf you have assigned connections but

not assigned any connection to the

base, a handset or the answering

machine as the receive connection,

calls on this connection will not be

signalled.

If the number is only assigned to an

answering machine, calls will not be

signalled. If the answering machine is

switched on, it will accept the call.

Making calls

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / telephony.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

To deactivate the ringer, press the §Silence§

display key. You can accept the call as long as

it is displayed on the screen.

Accepting a call on a headset

Prerequisite: You have assigned the Head-

set function to a function key on the base

before connecting the headset

(¢page 116).

Bluetooth headset:

Prerequisite: Bluetooth is activated; a con-

nection has been established between the

Bluetooth headset and the handset

(¢page 108).

¤Press the Headset function key on the

base.

Wire-bound headsets:

Prerequisite: The headset is connected to

the base (¢page 12).

¤Press the Headset function key on the

base.

For more information about wire-bound

headsets see page 115.

Accepting calls to your mobile

connection (Link2mobile)

You can register your GSM mobile with the

base via Bluetooth and accept calls to the

mobile on the base (or a registered handset)

(¢page 113).

Prerequisites:

Calls to the mobile (to the mobile number)

are signalled on the base. The Bluetooth

name of the mobile is shown as the receive

connection in the display (e.g., for mobile)

¤On the base: Pick up the receiver.

Calling Line Identification

When you receive a call, the caller's number

and/or name is displayed on the screen if the

following prerequisites are met.

uYour network provider supports CLIP, CLI

and CNIP.

– CLI (Calling Line Identification): The

caller's number is transmitted.

– CLIP (Calling Line Identification Pres-

entation): The caller's number is dis-

played.

– CNIP (Calling Name Identification

Presentation): The caller's name is dis-

played.

uYou have requested CLIP or CNIP from

your network provider.

uThe caller has arranged CLI with the

network provider.

Recommendation

We recommend you assign the Headset

function to a function key on the

base (¢page 116) and use this func-

tion key to accept calls – even if your

headset has a push-to-talk key.

Please note

If both a Bluetooth headset and a wire-

bound headset are connected to the

base, the call will be accepted on the

Bluetooth headset.

uThe mobile is within range of the base

(< 10 m) and has a connection to

the base.

uThe GSM connection is assigned to the

base (or handset) as receive connection

(¢page 128).

Please note

A call is cancelled as soon as the mobile is

outside the range of the base (about

10 m) or Bluetooth is deactivated.

Making calls

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / telephony.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Call display

If the caller's number is saved in your direc-

tory, the caller's name will be displayed.

If you have assigned a caller picture

(¢page 70) to the caller, this is shown in

the left-hand section of the display.

You can use the display to decide which

receive connection the call is directed to.

(Example of display)

1 Number or name of the caller

2 Receive connection: Indicates which of your

phone numbers the caller has dialled. The

name you set when configuring the phone

(¢page 126) or the default name is dis-

played (Fixed line or MSN1 to MSN10, IP1

to IP6). For calls from Gigaset.net, for Gigas-

et.net is displayed.

The following is displayed instead of the

number:

uExternal, if no number is transmitted.

uWithheld, if the caller has withheld Call-

ing Line Identification (page 58).

uUnavailable, if the caller has not

arranged Calling Line Identification.

Display with CNIP

If you have CNIP, then the name (town) that

is registered with your network provider for

the caller's number is displayed. If the

number of the caller is stored in your direc-

tory, the CNIP display is replaced by the cor-

responding directory entry.

(Example of display)

1Caller's number

2Name and town/city

The display shows:

uExternal, if no number is transmitted.

uWithheld, if the caller has withheld Call-

ing Line Identification (page 58).

uUnavailable, if the caller has not

arranged Calling Line Identification.

Notes on calling line display

(CLIP)

By default, the number of the caller is shown

in the display of your Gigaset telephone. You

do not have to make any other settings on

your Gigaset telephone.

However, if the caller's number is not

displayed, this can be due to the

following:

uYou have not requested CLIP from your

provider

uYour telephone is connected via a PABX

or a router with an integrated PABX (gate-

way) that does not transmit all informa-

tion.

Is your telephone connected via a

PABX/gateway?

You can establish this by checking for an

additional device connected between your

telephone and home connection e.g., a

PABX, gateway etc. In most cases, simply

resetting this device will remedy the situa-

tion:



ØÙÚ 1234567890

for IP1

Reject Silence



ØÙÚ 1234567890

Anna Sand, Berlin

for IP1

Reject Silence

Making calls

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / telephony.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

¤Briefly disconnect the PABX power plug.

Re-insert the plug and wait for the device

to restart.

If the caller number is still not

displayed:

¤Check the CLIP settings of your PABX and

activate this function if necessary. In the

user guide for the device, search for the

term "CLIP" (or an alternative term such

as "calling line identification", "phone

number transmission", "caller ID" etc.).

If necessary, contact the device manufac-

turer.

If this does not resolve the problem, it is pos-

sible that your network provider does not

provide the CLIP service for this number.

Have you ordered the calling line

display service from your network

provider?

¤Check whether your provider supports

calling line display (CLIP) and that the

function has been activated for you.

If necessary, contact your provider.

Additional information on this subject can

be found on the Gigaset homepage at:

www.gigaset.com/service

VoIP telephony via

Gigaset.net

You can use Gigaset.net to make free phone

calls via the Internet directly to other

Gigaset.net users, without having to set up

an account with a VoIP provider or make any

further settings. You simply have to connect

your phone to the power supply and the

Internet connection and, if necessary, enter

yourself in the Gigaset.net online directory

under a name of your choice (¢page 80).

Gigaset.net is a VoIP service provided by

Gigaset Communications GmbH to which all

users of a Gigaset VoIP device can subscribe.

You can call other subscribers to Gigaset.net

free of charge i.e., there are no telephone

charges other than the costs for your Inter-

net connection. Connections to/from other

networks are not possible.

The base automatically dials phone num-

bers ending with the suffix #9 via the

Gigaset.net connection.

Every Gigaset VoIP device is assigned a

Gigaset.net phone number by default

(¢page 146).

All registered subscribers are included in the

Gigaset.net directory, which you are able to

access.

An echo service is available for you to check

your VoIP connection.

The echo service is available in six lan-

guages:

u12341#9 (English)

u12342#9 (Dutch)

u12343#9 (Italian)

u12344#9 (French)

u12345#9 (German)

u12346#9 (Spanish)

After an announcement, the echo service

immediately sends back the voice data you

have received in the form of an echo.

Please note

Gigaset.net supports broadband teleph-

ony: Gigaset.net calls that you make

from your phone with a different broad-

band-capable terminal have excellent

sound quality.

Exclusion of liability

Gigaset.net is a voluntary service pro-

vided by Gigaset Communications

GmbH with no liability or guarantee for

the availability of the network and the

service.

Making calls

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / telephony.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Gigaset HDSP – telephony

with brilliant sound quality

Your Gigaset tele-

phone supports the

broadband codec

G.722. You can there-

fore use it to make calls

with brilliant sound

quality (High Definition Sound Perform-

ance).

If you register broadband-capable handsets

with your base, internal calls between these

handsets and between the base and hand-

set will also be conducted via broadband.

The following are prerequisites for broad-

band connections on your telephone:

uFor internal calls:

The handsets involved are broadband-

capable, i.e., they support codec G.722.

uFor external calls via VoIP:

– You make the call on the base or from

a broadband-capable handset.

– You have selected codec G.722 for

outgoing calls.

– Your VoIP provider supports broad-

band connections.

– The recipient's phone supports codec

G.722 and accepts the establishment

of a broadband connection.

Activating/deactivating

handsfree/open listening

mode

In handsfree mode, you use the microphone

and speaker on the base rather than the

receiver. For example, this allows others to

participate in the call.

In open listening mode, you hold the con-

versation via the receiver and also activate

the speaker on the base (receiver and hands-

free mode).

¤Inform your caller before you use the

handsfree function so that the caller

knows a third party may be listening.

Activating/deactivating open

listening

¤Press the handsfree key d to activate/

deactivate open listening in receiver

mode.

Activating handsfree mode while

dialling

~d Enter the number and press the

handsfree key.

End the call:

TPress the red end key.

Switching from receiver to

handsfree mode

Prerequisite: You are making a call via the

receiver or via the receiver with open listen-

ing mode activated.

d& Press and hold the handsfree

key until you have put the

receiver down.

dIf the handsfree key does not

light up, press the key again.

Please note

If you do not use your Gigaset.net con-

nection for six months, it is automatically

deactivated. You cannot be reached for

calls from Gigaset.net.

The connection is reactivated as soon as

you:

uStart a search in the Gigaset.net direc-

tory

uMake a call via Gigaset.net (dial a

number with #9 at the end)

uActivate the connection via the Web

configurator

Please note

The VoIP service Gigaset.net

(¢page 55) supports broadband con-

nections.

Making calls

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / telephony.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Switching from handsfree to

receiver mode

cPick up the receiver. The speaker

on the base is deactivated.

Muting the base

You can deactivate the microphone on the

receiver, base (handsfree) and any con-

nected headset (wire-bound or Bluetooth)

during an external call (including during a

conference call or when call swapping).

The other parties cannot hear you, but you

can still hear them.

Prerequisite: You are conducting an exter-

nal call.

Deactivating the microphone

PPress the mute key. The display

shows Microphone is off.

Unmuting the microphone

PPress the mute key again to

unmute the microphone.

If a second call (call waiting) is received in

mute mode, this is signalled acoustically as

usual. However, it is only shown on the dis-

play once the microphone has been

unmuted.

Please note

In handsfree mode, you can adjust the

handsfree volume with the R and

S keys.

Please note

In mute mode, all keys on the base are

deactivated with the exception of the:

uMute key P

uRed end key T with which you can

end a call

uS and R keys with which you

can adjust the volume on the receiver,

speaker or headset (the speaker is

activated; the microphone remains

deactivated)

uThe function or display key that is

assigned the Headset function

(¢page 116) and with which you

can transfer a call to a connected

headset.

Making calls using network services

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / netservices.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Making calls using

network services

Network services are functions that your

network provider makes available to you.

Please note:

uSome settings cannot be made simulta-

neously on the base and registered hand-

sets. If this is the case, you will hear a neg-

ative acknowledge tone.

uSome of the following network services

are not offered on all telephone net-

works. They are provider or network-spe-

cific. Network services that are, for exam-

ple, only applicable to the analogue fixed

line are not offered in the menus on the

base and registered handsets when the

base is connected to the network. The

same applies to specific network services.

uSome network services may only be used

if you have requested them from your or

fixed line network provider (there may be

an extra charge).

¤If you require assistance, please contact

your network provider.

Configuring general settings

for all calls

Anonymous calling – withholding

number

You can make anonymous calls (CLIR =

Calling Line Identification Restriction).

Your phone number will not be displayed

when you make outgoing calls. You are call-

ing anonymously.

Prerequisites:

uFor anonymous calls via your fixed line

connection, you need to have requested

the relevant service (feature) from your

network provider.

uAnonymous calls are only possible via

VoIP connections through providers that

support the "anonymous calling" func-

tion. You may have to ask your VoIP pro-

vider to activate this function.

Activating/deactivating "anonymous

calling" for all calls

You can permanently activate/deactivate

the "withholding number" function for all

your phone's connections (fixed line, VoIP).

When this function is activated, the phone

number is withheld for all fixed line calls and

for all calls via VoIP connections. The with-

hold number function is activated for the

base and all registered handsets.

v ¢ÇSelect Services

Block No. All Calls

Select and press §OK§ (μ=on).

For instructions on withholding the number

temporarily for a subsequent call see

page 61.

General call divert (CD)

A distinction is made between

uDiverting calls internally and

uDiverting calls to an external phone

number

CD to an external connection

With call divert the call is diverted to another

external connection. Your call divert settings

can be specific to a particular connection i.e.,

for each connection ( MSNs/fixed line num-

ber and VoIP connection), assigned to the

base as the receive connection.

Prerequisite: The VoIP provider supports call

divert.

v ¢ÇSelect Services ¢Call Divert

A list containing the configured and acti-

vated receive connections for your phone

and Internal is displayed.

¤Select the receive connection for which

you want to activate or deactivate call

divert, and press §OK§.

¤You can enter data in the following fields:

Status

Making calls using network services

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / netservices.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Activate/deactivate call divert.

Phone Number

Enter the number to which the call is to

be diverted. For every connection, you

can specify a different fixed line, VoIP or

mobile number.

You must specify another Gigaset.net

number when diverting a call from your

Gigaset.net number.

When

Select All Calls / When Busy / No Answer.

All Calls: Calls are diverted immediately

i.e., no calls are signalled to this /phone

number on your base.

No Answer: Calls are diverted if no one

accepts the call within several rings.

When Busy: Calls are diverted when your

line is busy.

§Save§ Press the display key.

For diverting calls from a fixed line connec-

tion:

A connection is established to the telephone

network to activate/deactivate call divert.

¤After confirmation from the fixed line,

press the red end key T.

Diverting calls internally

You can divert all external calls intended for

a base receive connection to a handset or

device connected to the FAX port.

v ¢ÇSelect Services ¢Call Divert

Internal Select and press §OK§.

¤You can enter data in the following fields:

Status

Activate/deactivate call divert.

To handset

Select internal party.

No HS is displayed if internal call divert

has not been set previously or if the pre-

viously set handset is no longer regis-

tered.

Ring delay

If you prefer to have a delay before the

call is diverted, select the length of the

delay (None, 10 sec., 20 sec. or 30 sec.).

If you select None, the call is not signalled

on the base and is diverted immediately.

§Save§ Press the display key.

Internal call divert is only single-stage i.e., if

calls for the base are diverted to a handset

(e.g., MT1) on which a call divert is also active

(e.g., to MT2), this second call divert is not

activated. The calls are signalled on handset

MT1.

Activating/deactivating call

waiting for external calls (VoIP)

If the function is activated, during an exter-

nal call you will hear a call waiting tone to

signal that another external caller is trying to

get through. If you have CLIP, the number of

the waiting caller or the corresponding

directory entry is shown in the display.

The caller will hear the ringing tone.

When call waiting is deactivated, the caller

will hear the busy tone if you are already

making a call, you are the only party

assigned to this connection and this connec-

tion is not assigned to an answering

machine.

Please note

Diverting calls to your phone numbers

can result in additional costs. Please con-

sult your provider.

Please note

uAny call for the base that has been

diverted is entered in the base call

lists.

uIf a call to a receive connection that is

only assigned to the base is diverted

to a handset that is not available (e.g,.

the handset is deactivated), the call is

rejected after a short time.

Making calls using network services

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / netservices.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Activating/deactivating call waiting

Prerequisite for calls via VoIP: At least two

parallel VoIP connections are permitted on

your telephone (setting can be changed via

the Web configurator).

v ¢ÇSelect Services ¢Call Waiting

Status Select On / Off to activate/deac-

tivate call waiting.

¤Press the display key §Save§.

Call waiting is activated/deactivated for all

connections to the telephone and all regis-

tered devices.

Special settings for calls via VoIP

Prerequisite: Your telephone is connected

to the network.

Activating/deactivating transfer –

ECT (Explicit Call Transfer)

If the Transfer (ECT) function is activated,

you can connect two external callers with

one another by replacing the receiver or

pressing the red end key T

(¢page 63). This assumes that you are

making an external call via one of your VoIP

connections and start an external consulta-

tion call.

You can activate/deactivate this function for

calls via your base.

v ¢ÇSelect Services

Transfer (ECT)

Select and press §OK§ (³=on).

Setting up a busy signal for when the

MSN is being used (Busy on Busy)

If this function is activated, callers immedi-

ately hear the busy tone if an external call

is already in progress via the called MSN

or VoIP connection. The waiting call is

not signalled, regardless of the setting for

Call Waiting (¢page 59).

v ¢ÇSelect Services

Busy on Busy

Select and press §OK§ (³=on).

Special settings for calls via the

analogue fixed line

Prerequisite: The base is connected to the

analogue fixed line.

Rejecting unknown calls

Calls to your fixed line number for which the

caller has withheld Calling Line Identifica-

tion (CLIR) are rejected.

v ¢ÇSelect Services

¢Unknown Call Reject.

Status: Activate/deactivate.

§OK§ Press the display key to send a

specific code to the exchange.

¤After confirmation from the telephone

network, press the red end key T.

Please note

The transfer of the call by replacing the

receiver is not supported by all providers

and PABXs.

Please note

For your VoIP connections you can set

the transfer via the Web configurator

(see operating instructions for the

Web configurator on the enclosed CD;

Call Transfer).

Making calls using network services

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / netservices.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Configuring settings for the

next call

Activating "anonymous calling" for

the next call

You can withhold your phone number for

the next call (CLIR = Calling Line Identifica-

tion Restriction). The setting applies to all

the phone's connections.

In idle status:

v ¢Ç Select Services

¢Next Call ¢Withhold Number

Select and press §OK§.

~Enter the number or copy from

the directory.

§Dial§ Press the display key or pick up

the receiver. The number is

dialled.

Generally, you can withhold your number for

all calls (¢page 58).

Activating/deactivating the

keypad function for the next call

Prerequisite: Your telephone is connected

to the network. You have selected an MSN as

the send connection.

The keypad function allows you to control

certain features by entering sequences of

characters and digits. For keypad control see

page 135.

You can temporarily activate keypad control

for the next call.

v ¢Ç Select Services ¢Next Call

¢Keypad Control

Select and press §OK§.

~ Enter phone number.

§Dial§ Press the display key or pick up

the receiver. The number is

dialled.

Suppress call waiting with the next

call (fixed line)

Prerequisite: Your telephone is connected

to the analogue fixed line. You have selected

a fixed line connection as the send connec-

tion.

Call waiting will not be signalled for the next

call, even if "Call Waiting" is activated

(¢page 59).

v ¢Ç Select Services ¢Next Call

¢Call Waiting

~ Enter phone number.

§Dial§ Press the display key or pick up

the receiver. The number is

dialled.

Configuring settings during

an external call

Initiating ringback when busy/no

answer (analogue connection)

If the person you are calling does not answer

or their line is busy, you can initiate ringback.

Ringback when busy: The ringback will take

place as soon as the party in question termi-

nates the current call.

Please note

The phone number is stored, together

with the setting, in the redial list.

Please note

For VoIP telephony, the services described

below are only available if parallel IP con-

nections are permitted.

Please note

uYou can use this function only for calls

via the analogue fixed line or the net-

work.

uA ringback display key/menu func-

tion for activating ringback only

appears on the base if the exchange

supports this feature.

Making calls using network services

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / netservices.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Ringback when no answer: The ringback will

take place as soon as the party in question

has made a call.

Initiate ringback:

Prerequisite: You have dialled a number and

set your fixed line connection or an MSN for

your connection as the send connection.

§Ringback§ Press the display key.

If ringback has been successfully activated,

the message Ringback activated is dis-

played. The call is ended. The base returns to

idle status.

If ringback has not been successfully acti-

vated in the exchange, Ringback not possi-

ble! appears in the display.

& / TReplace the receiver or press the

red end key.

Initiating ringback during an external

consultation call:

You wish to initiate an external consultation

call during an external call. The line is busy or

there is no answer.

§Options§ ¢Ringback

Select and press §OK§.

§End§ Press the display key to return to

the party on hold.

Accepting a waiting call

You are making an external call and hear the

call waiting tone.

§Accept§ Press the display key.

Once you have accepted the waiting call,

you can switch between the two callers

("Call swapping (VoIP)" ¢page 63) or

speak to both at the same time ("Confer-

ence (VoIP)" ¢page 63).

Rejecting a waiting call (VoIP)

You can hear the call waiting tone but do not

want to speak to the caller.

§Reject§ Press the display key.

The caller hears the busy tone.

Consultation calls (external)

You can call a second external caller. The first

call is placed on hold.

During an external call:

§Ext.Call§ Press the display key.

The previous call is placed on

hold. The caller hears an

announcement or music on

hold.

~Enter the second participant's

telephone number.

The phone number is dialled. You are con-

nected to the second participant.

If the participant does not answer, select the

display key §End§ to return to the first partici-

pant.

The consultation call is established via the

same send connection as the first call.

Please note

uYou can only activate one ringback at

a time. If you activate a second ring-

back, the first one is automatically

deleted.

uThe ringback is initiated on the previ-

ously used send connection.

uThe ringback can only be received on

the device that activated the ring-

back.

Please note

uWithout CLIP, a waiting call is only

announced with a signal tone.

uAn internal, waiting call is shown on

the display. You can neither accept

the internal call nor reject it.

uFor instructions on accepting a wait-

ing external call during an internal

call, ¢page 107.

Please note

You can also replace the receiver to end

the current call and lift the receiver again

to accept the second call.

Making calls using network services

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / netservices.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Ending a consultation call (VoIP)

§Options§ ¢End Active Call

You are reconnected to the first call partici-

pant.

If you have established the consultation call

via your fixed line connection, you can also

end the consultation call by replacing the

receiver. The connection is briefly inter-

rupted and you will receive a call back. As

soon as the receiver is lifted, you are recon-

nected to the first call participant.

This only applies to VoIP connections if

Transfer Call by On-Hook is not activated (:

"ECT" ¢page 60; VoIP: "Transfer Call by On-

Hook" ¢Web configurator).

Call swapping (VoIP)

You can speak to two callers one at a time

(call swap).

Prerequisite: You are conducting an exter-

nal call and have called a second participant

(consultation call) or have accepted a wait-

ing call.

¤Use q to swap between the participants.

The caller you are currently speaking to is

marked with the æ icon.

Ending a currently active call

§Options§ ¢End Active Call

You are re-connected to the waiting caller.

Conference (VoIP)

You can speak to two participants simulta-

neously.

Prerequisite: You are conducting an exter-

nal call and have called a second participant

(consultation call) or have accepted a wait-

ing call.

¤Press the display key §Conf.§.

You and the other two callers (both marked

by the æ icon) can hear and speak to each

other simultaneously.

Ending a conference call

¤Press the display key §EndConf§.

You return to "call swap" status.

Or:

Prerequisite:

For VoIP connections: Transfer Call by On-

Hook is not activated

& Replace the receiver to end the

call with both participants.

Each of the callers can end their participa-

tion in the conference call by pressing the

end call key and replacing the handset.

Transferring calls

Transferring a call to an internal party

You are making an external call and would

like to transfer it to another handset.

¤Set up an internal consultation call

(¢page 106).

&Replace the receiver (even

before the other party has

answered) to transfer the call.

Transferring a call to an external

number – ECT (Explicit Call Transfer)

You are making an external call via an VoIP

connection and wish to transfer the call to

another external party.

Prerequisite: The feature is supported by

the relevant network provider.

VoIP connection:

If you have activated the function Transfer

Call by On-Hook for VoIP (¢Web configu-

rator: Telephony ¢Advanced Settings).

&Replace the receiver (even

before the other party has

answered) to transfer the call.

Please note

You can also select the second partici-

pant's phone number from the directory

(page 73), redial list or a call list

(page 66).

Making calls using network services

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / netservices.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Identifying nuisance callers –

identify caller function

Identify caller is used to identify annoying or

threatening callers.

Prerequisites:

uYou have requested the identify caller

function from your network provider.

uYou are conducting an external call via an

connection.

Activate this function during the call or

immediately after the caller has hung up.

You must not end the call yourself i.e., you

must not replace the receiver!

This does not affect any other call that is

being made at the same time.

The caller is identified in the telephone

exchange and is recorded by phone number,

time and date. A printout of the list is then

sent by your network provider through the

post.

Prerequisite: You are conducting an exter-

nal call or the external call participant has

hung up; however, you are maintaining the

connection.

§Options§ ¢ Identify Caller

You can then continue the call or replace the

receiver.

Functions after a call

Cancelling ringback

Prerequisite: Ringback is activated for your

fixed line or connection (page 61).

v ¢Ç Select Services ¢Ringback Off

The telephone is connected to the

analogue fixed line:

A connection is established to the exchange

and a code sent.

¤After confirmation from the telephone

network, press the red end key T.

The telephone is connected to the

network:

The phone number activated for ringback is

shown in the display.

¤Press the display key §Delete§ to deactivate

ringback.

Ringback disabled is displayed on the

screen.

Please note

If the ringback was signalled before

you could cancel it, you can end it

using §Cancel§.

Using lists

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / lists.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Using lists

The options are:

uRedial list

uCall lists

uMissed alarms list

uAnswering machine list

Redial list

The redial list contains the 20 numbers last

dialled with the base (max. 32 digits). If one

of the numbers is in the directory, the corre-

sponding name will be displayed.

Manual redial

QPress the key to open the redial

list.

sSelect entry.

cPick up the receiver.

The number is dialled.

When a name is displayed, you can display

the corresponding phone number:

¤Press the display key §View§ or the middle

of the control key.

¤Press right or left on the control key as

required to view the next/previous

number.

Open the redial list. Once you have assigned

a line (e.g., to establish an external consulta-

tion call); you must then press the display

key §Dial§ to dial the selected number.

Automatic redial

In idle status:

QPress the key.

sSelect entry.

§Options§ Open menu.

Automatic Redial

Select and press §OK§.

Or (for VoIP calls only):

You try to call a number and you hear the

busy tone or the party does not answer:

§Options§ Open menu.

Automatic Redial

Select and press §OK§.

The base switches to idle status. The display

shows Auto Redial together with the phone

number.

The number is automatically dialled at fixed

intervals (at least every 20 seconds). The

speaker key flashes, "open listening" is

switched on, the microphone is switched off.

uThe party answers: Pick up the receiver

cor press the handsfree key d.

"Automatic redial" ends. The base

switches to normal receiver/speaker

mode.

uParty does not answer: The call is termi-

nated after approx. 30 seconds. After

ten unsuccessful attempts, "Automatic

redial" ends.

¤To cancel automatic redial, press the dis-

play key §OFF§ or any key.

Please note

One automatic redial function can be

active per device (registered handsets

and base). Overall, one automatic redial

function can be active on the telephone

system for each available line.

If automatic redial is assigned to all lines,

you will hear the busy tone when you try

to activate another.

Using lists

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / lists.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Managing entries in the redial list

In idle status:

QPress the key.

sSelect entry.

§Options§ Open menu.

You can select the following functions

with q:

Copy to Directory

Copy an entry to the directory (page 69).

Automatic Redial

¢ "Automatic redial", page 65.

Display Number

(As in the directory, page 71)

Delete Entry

Delete selected entry.

(As in the directory, page 71)

Delete List

Delete complete list.

(As in the directory, page 71)

Answering machine list

You can use the answering machine list to

listen to the messages that are on the

answering machine (¢page 92).

Call lists

Prerequisite: Calling Line Identification

Presentation (CLIP, page 53)

Your base stores various types of calls:

uAccepted calls (from the user or the

answering machine)

uOutgoing calls

uMissed calls

You can view each type of call separately

or gain an overview of all calls. The last

30 entries are displayed in the lists of missed

and accepted calls. This list of outgoing calls

can contain up to 60 entries.

You can open the call lists in idle status by

pressing up on the control key tor via the

menu:

v ¢Ê ¢All Calls / Outgoing Calls /

Accepted Calls / Missed Calls

Please note

You can receive information on

unknown numbers free of charge via the

reverse search in the online directory

(¢page 75).

Using lists

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / lists.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

List entry

New messages are displayed at the top.

Example of list entries:

uList type (in header)

uThe entry status (only in the list of missed

calls)

Bold: New entry

uNumber or name of caller

uName of MSN/connection to which the

missed/accepted call was directed (for

receive connection), or via which the out-

going call was dialled (via send connec-

tion) The connection name you have

assigned is displayed where available.

Otherwise, the standard name is used.

uDate and time of call (if set).

uType of entry:

– Accepted calls ( › )

– Missed calls ( ™ )

– Outgoing calls ( š )

– Calls recorded by the answering

machine (Ã)

Pick up the receiver or press the handsfree

key d to call the selected caller back.

Select the §View§ display key to access addi-

tional information, including for example

the number linked to the name. If you have

CNIP, then the name and town that is regis-

tered with your network provider for this

number is displayed. If the name and town

are not shown, it means that the caller has

not requested Calling Line Identification or

that the number has been withheld.

Use the §Options§ display key to select the fol-

lowing options:

Copy to Directory

Copy number to the directory.

Delete Entry

Delete selected entry.

Delete List

Delete all entries.

When you quit the call lists, all entries are set

to the status "old", i.e., the next time you call

up the list, they will no longer be shown in

bold.

Missed Calls

™ Frank

for IP2

07. 14.11, 03:40pm

™ 089563795

for IP1 V

View Options

Please note

Multiple calls from the same number are

stored once in the missed calls list (the

latest call). The number of calls from this

number is shown in brackets after the

entry.

One Withheld entry is created for all

missed calls for which the number of the

caller was withheld.

Equally, one Unavailable entry is created

for every call for which the number was

not transferred.

Please note

In the case of each internal party (base,

handset), only those received/missed

calls directed to its receive connection

are shown.

Using lists

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / lists.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Opening lists with the

message key

Use the message key f to open the fol-

lowing lists:

uAnswering machine list or network mail-

box, if your network provider supports

this function and quick dial is set for the

network mailbox (¢page 98).

uMissed calls list

uMissed alarms list

An advisory tone sounds as soon as a new

entry appears on a list. The f key flashes

(it goes off when the key is pressed). In idle

status, the display shows an icon for the new

message:

The number of new entries is displayed to

the right of the corresponding icon.

After pressing the message key f, you

can see all lists containing messages and the

network mailbox list.

Lists containing new messages are at the top

of the list and are marked in a bold font.

Select a list with q. To open, press §OK§.

Icon New message ...

Ã ... in an answering machine list or on

the network mailbox

™ ... in the Missed Calls list

Ë ... in the e-mail list

n ... in the Missed Alarms list

Please note

If calls are saved in the network mailbox,

you will receive a message if the appro-

priate settings have been made (see your

network provider user guide).

Ã1 2 3

Ã02 ™ 10 Ën08

Messages & Calls

Missed Calls: (3)

Missed Alarms: (1)

Back OK

Using directories

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / directories.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Using directories

The options are:

u(Local) directory (¢page 69)

uPublic online directory and classified

directory (¢page 74)

uGigaset.net directory) (¢page 78)

uPrivate net directory

Using the local base directory

You can save a total of 1000 entries in the

directory.

Not only can you create a personalised direc-

tory for your base, but you can send entries

from it to handsets too (page 71).

Directory entries

You can save the following information in a

directory entry:

uName and surname

uUp to three numbers

uE-mail address

uAnniversary with reminder

uVIP ringer with VIP icon

uCaller picture

Open the directory in idle status or during an

external call with the s key (press briefly) or

via the menu

v ¢Î ¢Directory

Length of the entries

Saving number(s) in the directory –

new entry

s ¢<New Entry>

¤You can enter data in the following fields:

First Name: / Last Name:

Enter first names and/or surnames.

If you do not enter a name in either of the

fields, the first phone number saved in

the entry is saved and displayed in place

of a surname.

For instructions on entering text and

special characters, see page 149.

Phone (Home): / Phone (Office): /

Phone (Mobile):

Enter a number in at least one of the

fields.

When scrolling through the directory,

prefixed icons indicate which numbers

are contained in the entry:

ä denotes Phone (Home),

kdenotes Phone (Office),

ldenotes Phone (Mobile).

E-Mail:

Enter the e-mail address.

Anniversary:

Select On or Off.

With setting On:

Enter Anniversary (Date) and Anniver-

sary (Time) and select reminder type:

Anniversary (Signal) (¢page 73).

Caller Melody (VIP):

Mark a directory entry as a VIP

(Very Important Person) by assigning

a specific ringer to it. You recognise

VIP calls by the ringer.

VIP entries are highlighted by the

Æicon in the directory.

Prerequisite: Calling Line Identification

(page 53).

Please note

You can assign numbers from the direc-

tory to the function/display keys for

quick access (quick dial) (page 116).

3 numbers: Max. 32 digits each

Name and surname: Max. 16 characters

each

E-mail address: Max. 60 characters

Ball, Tim

äk l Sand, Anna Æ

Turner, Tom Æ

Using directories

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / directories.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Caller Picture:

Prerequisite: Calling Line Identification

Presentation (CLIP).

You can select:

– A picture to be displayed when the

party calls (see Resource directory,

page 122).

– One of the colours from Color 1 to

Color 6, to be used as the display col-

our when the caller calls.

–No Picture if there is to be no visual

signal for the caller

§Save§ Press the display key.

Order of directory entries

Directory entries are generally sorted alpha-

betically by surname. Spaces and digits take

first priority. If only the first name was

entered in the directory, this is incorporated

into the sort order instead of the surname.

The sort order is as follows:

1. Space

2. Digits (0–9)

3. Letters (alphabetical)

4. Remaining characters (*, #, $ etc.)

To get round the alphabetical order of the

entries, insert a space or a digit in front of the

first letter of the surname. These entries will

then move to the beginning of the directory.

Searching for a directory entry

sOpen the directory.

You have the following options:

uUse s to scroll through the entries until

the required name is selected.

Press s briefly to scroll on an entry-to-

entry basis.

Press and hold s to scroll through the

directory.

uEnter the first letters of the name (max. 8),

if necessary scroll to the entry with the s

key. The letters entered are displayed in

the bottom display line.

To skip from any point in the list to the

start of the list (<New Entry>), press the

red end key T briefly.

The directory searches for the surname.

If a surname has not been added, then it

will search for the first name.

Dialling with the directory

s ¢s(Select entry).

cPick up the receiver.

Or during a call:

§Dial§ Press the display key.

If the entry only contains one phone

number, this is the number that is dialled.

If the entry contains several numbers, the

icons for the numbers stored are displayed:

ä / k / l.

r Select a number.

§Dial§ Press the display key.

The number is dialled.

Please note

When dialling, you can link several num-

bers from the directory (e.g., a call-by-call

number to a telephone number,

¢page 82).

Using directories

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / directories.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Managing directory entries

Viewing entries

s ¢s(Select entry).

§View§ / wPress the display key or the mid-

dle of the control key. The entry

is displayed.

qScroll through the entry if nec-

essary.

Using other functions

Prerequisite: The directory was opened

while the base was in idle status.

§Options§ Press the display key.

You can select the following functions

with q:

Display Number

Select a number from the entry as

required and press the display key §Dial§.

Edit or add to the saved number and then

dial with c or save as a new entry; for

the latter, press the display key Óafter

the number is displayed.

Delete Entry

Delete the selected entry.

Copy Entry

–to Internal: Send a single entry to a

handset (page 71).

–vCard via Bluetooth: Send a single

entry in vCard format via Bluetooth.

Editing entries

s ¢s(Select entry).

§View§ §Edit§ Press the display keys one after

the other.

¤Perform changes and save.

Using other functions

When the base is in idle status:

s ¢s(Select entry)

¢§Options§ (Open menu)

You can select the following functions

with q:

Display Number

(see above/page 71)

Edit Entry

Edit selected entry.

Delete Entry

Delete selected entry.

Copy Entry

(see above/page 71)

Delete List

Delete all entries in the directory.

Copy List

to Internal: Send the complete list to a

handset (page 71).

vCard via Bluetooth: Send the complete

list in vCard format via Bluetooth.

Available Memory

Display the number of entries that are still

available in the directory.

Exchanging directory/entries with

handsets

You can send entries from the local directory

or the complete local directory to handsets

as well as receive directory entries from the

handsets.

Please note:

uEntries with identical numbers are not

overwritten on the receiving handset.

uThe transfer is cancelled if the base rings

or the receiving memory is full.

uAnniversary reminders, pictures and

sounds entered are not transferred.

Prerequisites:

uThe receiving handset is registered to the

base.

uThe handset can send and receive direc-

tory entries.

Using directories

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / directories.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Sending a directory/directory entries

to a handset

s ¢s(Select entry)

¢§Options§ (Open menu)

¢Copy Entry / Copy List

¢to Internal

sSelect the internal number of

the receiving handset and

press §OK§.

The transfer begins.

You can transfer several individual entries

one after the other by responding to the

Entry copied - Copy next entry? prompt

with §Yes§, selecting the entry and §Copy§, or

pressing the middle of the control key w.

A successful transfer is confirmed by a mes-

sage and confirmation tone.

Receiving a directory/directory entries

from a handset

Prerequisite: The base is in idle status.

¤Start the transfer of directory entries on

the handset as described in the handset

user guide.

If the data has been transferred successfully,

the display on the base will indicate the

number of entries received (so far).

Transferring the directory/entries

as a vCard with Bluetooth

In Bluetooth mode (¢page 108), you can

transfer directory entries in vCard format

e.g., to exchange entries with your mobile or

PC.

s ¢s(Select entry)

¢§Options§ (Open menu)

¢Copy Entry / Copy List

¢vCard via Bluetooth

The list of "Known Devices" (¢page 110)

is displayed and Bluetooth is activated,

if necessary.

sSelect device and press §OK§.

Or:

<Search> Select and press §OK§ to search

for Bluetooth devices.

sSelect device and press §OK§.

~If necessary, enter the PIN for

the Bluetooth device and

press §OK§ (page 109).

The transfer starts.

Once an individual entry has been trans-

ferred, you can select an additional entry in

the directory and transfer it to the Bluetooth

device using §Copy§.

Receiving a vCard with Bluetooth

If a device from the "Known Devices" list

(¢page 110) sends a vCard to your base,

this occurs automatically. You are informed

about it via the display.

If the sending device does not appear in the

list, you are asked on the display to enter the

device PIN for the sending device:

~If necessary, enter the PIN for

the sending Bluetooth device

and press §OK§.

The vCard transfer starts.

If the device should be added to the list of

known Bluetooth devices, press the display

key §Yes§ after the transfer. Pressing §No§

returns the base to idle status.

Please note

The transfer is interrupted in the event of

an external incoming call.

Please note

Any incoming calls are ignored during

the vCard transfer.

Using directories

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / directories.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Adding a displayed number to

the directory

You can add numbers to the directory:

uFrom a list e.g., the call/answering

machine list or the redial list

uFrom a public online directory or classi-

fied directory

uFrom your private net directory

uWhen dialling a number

A number is displayed:

§Options§ ¢Copy to Directory

Or:

ÓPress the display key.

The directory is opened. You can create a

new entry or extend an existing entry.

s Select <New Entry> or the

directory entry and press §OK§.

rSelect the type of phone

number ä / k / land

press §OK§. The number is copied

into the corresponding field.

If the number field is already occupied,

Overwrite existing number? is displayed.

§Yes§ Press the display key to over-

write the number. If you select

§No§, you are asked to select

another type of phone number.

¤If necessary, complete the entry

(¢page 69).

Copying a number or e-mail

address from the directory

In some operating situations, you can open

the directory to copy a number or e-mail

address, for example. Your base does not

have to be in idle status.

¤Depending on the operating situation,

open the directory with s or ö.

qSelect entry (¢page 70).

Saving an anniversary in the

directory

For each entry in the directory, you can save

an anniversary and specify a time at which a

reminder call should be made on the anni-

versary (default setting: Anniversary: Off).

Anniversaries are automatically recorded in

the calendar (page 100).

s ¢s (Select entry)

§View§ §Edit§ Press the display keys one after

the other.

sScroll to the Anniversary: line.

vSelect On. The following fields

are displayed.

¤You can enter data in the following fields:

Anniversary (Date)

Enter day/month/year in 8-digit format.

Anniversary (Time)

Enter the hour/minute for the reminder

call in 4-digit format.

Anniversary (Signal)

Select the reminder type.

§Save§ Press the display key.

Please note

For a new entry:

uIf you have CNIP, the first 16 characters

of the transmitted name are also cop-

ied to the Last Name line.

uIf you are copying a number from an

online directory, the surname or nick-

name (if available) are copied into the

Last Name field.

uThe message playback is interrupted

during the number transfer from the

answering machine list.

Please note

A time must be specified for reminder

calls. If you have selected the visual sig-

nal, you do not have to specify the time.

Using directories

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / directories.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Deactivating anniversaries

s ¢s (Select entry)

§View§ §Edit§ Press the display keys one after

the other.

sScroll to the Anniversary: line.

vSelect Off.

§Save§ Press the display key.

Anniversary reminder call

In idle status, a reminder call is shown in the

display of the handset (¢page 4) and sig-

nalled with the selected ringer.

You can:

§OFF§ Press the display key to

acknowledge and end the

reminder call.

When you are on the phone, a reminder call

is indicated on the handset with a single

advisory tone.

Anniversaries that are indicated during a call

and are not acknowledged are entered in

the Missed Alarms list (page 102).

Using online directories

You can use public online directories (online

directories and classified directories e.g.,

"Yellow Pages") depending on your provider.

You can configure the online directories you

wish to use via the Web configurator.

Opening an online/classified

directory

Prerequisite: The base is in idle status.

sPress and hold.

Or:

v ¢Î Contacts ¢Network Directory

This opens the list of online directories. Pro-

vider-specific names appear in the display.

q Select a directory (online direc-

tory or classified directory) from

the list and press §OK§.

This establishes a connection to the online

directory or the classified directory.

If there is only one online directory available,

a connection is immediately established if

you press and hold down the control key.

Exclusion of liability

Gigaset Communications GmbH assumes

no guarantee or liability for the availability

of this service. The service may be discon-

tinued at any time.

Please note

You can also establish a connection to

the online directory as follows:

¤When the base is in idle status,

dial 1#91 and then pick up the

receiver c.

¤To establish a connection to the clas-

sified directory, dial 2#91.

¤To establish a connection to the

Gigaset.net directory, dial 1188#9.

Calls to the online directory are always

free of charge.

Using directories

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / directories.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Searching for an entry

Prerequisite: You have opened the online

directory/classified directory.

¤You can enter data in the following fields:

Last Name: (online directory) or

Category/Name: (classified directory)

Enter the name, part of a

name or the business type

(max. 30 characters).

City: Enter the name of the town/city

in which the party you are

searching for lives (max.

30 characters).

If you have already completed a

search, the last names of the

towns/cities you entered are

displayed (maximum of five).

You can enter a new name or

select one of the city names dis-

played using s and confirm

with §OK§.

Or:

Number: Enter the number

(max. 30 characters).

¤Press the display key §Search§ or w to start

the search.

You must make an entry in either Last Name

or Category/Name: and in City or in

Number. Searching by number is only possi-

ble if supported by the online directory you

have selected. For instructions on entering

text see page 149.

A list of the towns/cities found is displayed if

the search returns more than one result:

qSelect the town/city.

If the name of a town/city is

longer than one line, it is abbre-

viated. Select §View§ to view the

complete name.

If no matching town/city is

found: Press §Change§ to change

the search criteria. The entries

for Category/Name and City are

copied and you can change

them.

§Search§ Press the display key to con-

tinue the search.

A corresponding message will appear on the

display if no party is found to match the

search criteria. You have the following

options:

¤Press the display key §New§ to start a new

search.

Or:

¤Press the display key §Change§ to change

the search criteria. The name and town/

city are copied over and you can change

them.

No hits are displayed if the list of hits is too

large. A message to this effect is displayed.

¤Press the display key §Detail§ to start a

refined search (¢page 76).

Or:

¤Depending on the provider, you can view

the list if the number of hits is shown on

the display. Press the display key §View§.

Search result (hit list)

The search result is shown as a list on the dis-

play. Example:

1. 2/50: Consecutive number/total number of

hits (only the consecutive number is dis-

played if the total number of hits >99).

2. Four lines including party's name, business

type, telephone number and address (possi-

bly abbreviated). If a fixed line number is not

available, the mobile number (if available) is

displayed.

Net Directory 2/50

Sand, Marie Elisabe ...

0049123456789

Parkstraße 11

Berlin 12345, Germany

View Options

Using directories

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / directories.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

You have the following options:

¤You can scroll through the list with q.

¤Press the display key §View§. Displays the

full details of the entry (name, business

type where applicable, address, tele-

phone numbers). You can scroll through

the entry with q.

Use §Options§ to access the following options:

Refine search

Refine search criteria and restrict hit list

(¢page 76).

New search

Start a new search.

Copy to Directory

Copy an entry to the local directory. If an

entry contains several numbers, they are

displayed in a selection list. A new entry is

created for the selected number. The sur-

name is transferred to the Last Name

field of the local directory (¢page 73).

Copy to Private NetDir.

Transfer the selected entry to the private

net directory. The private directory and

online directory must be provided by the

same provider.

Depending on your provider, you can add

a nickname to the entry in your private

directory.

Calling subscribers

Prerequisite: A hit list is displayed.

¤Select an entry and pick up the

receiver c.

If the entry only contains one phone

number, this is the one that is dialled.

A list of numbers appears if there is more

than one number.

¤Using q, select a number and press the

display key §Dial§.

Starting a refined search

You can use the search options available in

the refined search (first name and/or street)

to limit the number of hits returned by a pre-

vious search.

Prerequisite: A search result is displayed (hit

list with multiple entries or a message indi-

cating too many hits).

§Detail§ Press the display key.

Or:

§Options§ ¢Refine search

Select and press §OK§.

The search criteria from the previous search

are copied and entered in the corresponding

fields.

Last Name: (online directory) or

Category/Name: (classified directory)

If necessary, change the name/

business type or extend the par-

tial name.

City: Name of the city/town from the

previous search is shown (can-

not be changed).

Street: If necessary, change the name

of the street (max. 30 chars.).

First Name: (only in the online directory)

If necessary, enter the first name

(max. 30 characters).

§Search§ Start refined search.

Using directories

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / directories.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Using the private net

directory

Some providers offer users the option of cre-

ating and managing a private net directory

on the Internet.

The advantage of an online directory is that

you can call up entries from any telephone

or PC e.g., from your VoIP phone in the office

or your PC at a hotel.

You can use the private net directory on your

base.

Prerequisites:

uYou can create your private net directory

using your PC's Web browser.

uYou can create and manage entries in the

online directory via your PC's Web

browser.

uActivate the online directory on your

base via the Web configurator. It is partic-

ularly important that you store the user

name and password for accessing the pri-

vate net directory in the base.

You can use the directory from every regis-

tered handset.

Opening the online directory

Prerequisite: The base is in idle status.

sPress and hold.

Or:

v ¢Î Contacts ¢Network Directory

This opens the list of (online) directories.

The provider-specific name is displayed for

the private net directory.

q Select the private online direc-

tory from the list and press §OK§.

Your private online directory is opened.

The entries in the online directory are sorted

alphabetically according to the first non-

space field in the entry. This is generally the

nickname or surname.

Selecting, viewing and managing

entries in the online directory

Prerequisite:

The online directory is open (see above).

¤Scroll with s to the required entry.

Or:

Enter the first letter of the name and

scroll with s to the required entry.

¤Press the display key §View§.

The detailed view with the complete entry

opens. You can scroll through the entry with

the control key q.

The following data is shown, if available (in

the sequence specific to the provider):

Nickname, name, first name, phone number,

mobile number, VoIP number, street, house

number, post code, town/city, company

name, business type, date of birth, e-mail.

Using other functions

§Options§ Press the display key.

You can select the following functions

with q:

Enter nickname

You can edit or delete the nickname in an

entry. Press §Save§ to save the change.

Copy to Directory

Copy an entry to the local directory

(¢page 73).

Please note

If there is no other online directory avail-

able apart from the private online direc-

tory:

¤Press s briefly. The private online

directory opens.

¤Press and hold s. The base local

directory opens.

Using directories

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / directories.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Calling up an entry in the online

directory

Prerequisite: You have opened the online

directory.

qSelect entry (open the details

view, if necessary).

cPick up the receiver.

If the entry only contains one phone

number, this is the one that is dialled.

If the entry contains more than one phone

number (e.g., mobile number and phone

number), they are offered to you for selec-

tion.

qSelect the number to be dialled.

§OK§ Press the display key.

The selected phone number is dialled.

Transferring the local directory to

the private online directory

You can save entries in the local directory in

vCard format as a vcf file on your PC with the

help of the Web configurator (¢ user guide

for the Web configurator on the enclosed

CD).

Several providers support functions on your

Web pages that you can use to copy these

files to the online directory.

Using the Gigaset.net

directory

The base is in idle status.

sPress and hold.

q If necessary, select Gigaset.net

from the list of available online

directories and press §OK§.

Or:

v ¢Î Contacts ¢Network Directory

This opens the list of online directories.

Gigaset.net

Select and press §OK§.

The Gigaset.net directory opens.

If a connection to the Gigaset.net directory

cannot be made, an error message is issued

and the base goes into idle status.

Opening the Gigaset.net directory for

the first time

When you open the Gigaset.net directory for

the first time, you are asked to enter a nick-

name for your connection. You are entered

in the Gigaset.net directory under this name.

¤Using the keypad, enter the name that

you would like to be listed under in the

Gigaset.net directory. The name may con-

tain a maximum of 25 characters.

Please note

You can copy numbers from a public

directory to your private online directory

(¢page 76).

Please note

uCalls to the Gigaset.net directory are

always free of charge.

uYou can also open the Gigaset.net

directory by dialling 1188#9 (phone

number of the Gigaset.net directory)

and picking up the receiver c.

Own Details

Your Gigaset.net

nickname:

Abc

< C Save

Using directories

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / directories.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

¤Press the right-hand display key §Save§.

If an entry with this name already exists, the

message Nickname exists! Please choose

another one. is displayed. You are prompted

to enter a name again.

Searching for subscribers in the

Gigaset.net directory

Once the connection to the Gigaset.net

directory has been established, you are

asked to enter a name that you want to

search for.

Gigaset.net name:

Enter the name or part of a

name (max. 25 characters).

§Search§ Press the display key to start the

search.

If the search has been successful, a hit list is

displayed containing all the names that

begin with the specified character string.

Example:

1. 2/50: Entry number/number of hits

2. Name of an entry, possibly abbreviated

You can scroll through the hit list with q.

If no matching entry is found, a correspond-

ing message is displayed. You have the fol-

lowing options:

¤Press the display key §New§ to start a new

search.

Or:

¤Press the §Change§ display key to change

the search criteria. The name you previ-

ously entered in the search field is used as

search criterion. You can then expand or

edit as required.

If there are too many matching entries

in the Gigaset.net directory, the message

Too many entries found. is displayed

instead of a hit list.

¤Press the display key §Detail§ to start a

refined search. The previously entered

name is copied and you can edit/expand

it.

Calling subscribers

qc Select the subscriber from the

hit list and pick up the receiver.

Data protection notice

If you enter a nickname at this point, it is

stored on a central Gigaset server. The

nickname appears in the Gigaset.net

directory, and other subscribers that use

the Gigaset.net service can call you using

this nickname.

By entering your data, you agree to

having your data saved. If you do not

wish this to happen, you can cancel the

operation at this point.

Further information about the

Gigaset.net service data saved can be

found at

www.gigaset.net/privacy-policy

Cancel operation:

Do not enter a name and press the dis-

play key §Save§. You can use the directory

to search for other Gigaset.net subscrib-

ers and call them. However, no nickname

is entered for you (your base).

Or:

Press the red end key T to exit the

Gigaset.net directory (without perform-

ing a search).

Gigaset.net 2/50

Saal, Frank

Sailor, Ben

Sand, Anna

Sand, Marie Elisabe ....

Sand, Otto x

View Options

Using directories

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / directories.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Viewing the subscriber's number

q Select the subscriber from the

hit list.

§View§ Press the display key.

The display shows the Gigaset.net number

and the subscriber's name, whereby the

name may appear over a number of lines.

q Display the name and number

of the next/previous subscriber

in the hit list.

Using other functions

Prerequisite: The hit list is displayed.

q(Select entry) ¢§Options§

You can select the following functions

with q:

Copy to Directory

Copy the number to the base directory.

The number and name (abbreviated if

necessary, max. 16 characters) are copied

to the local directory.

¤Edit and save the entry where neces-

sary (¢page 69).

The hit list is displayed again.

New search

Start a search with a new name

(¢page 79).

Refine search

Start a refined search. The name previ-

ously searched for is copied and you can

edit/expand it.

Own Details

See "Entering, editing and deleting

your own entry" on page 80.

Entering, editing and deleting your

own entry

You have the following options:

uEdit the name of your entry in the

Gigaset.net directory.

uDelete your entry from the Gigaset.net

directory.

Viewing your own entry

You are connected to the Gigaset.net direc-

tory and have performed a search. A hit list is

displayed:

¤Select §Options§ ¢ Own Details and

press §OK§.

Your Gigaset.net number and, where appli-

cable, your current name are displayed.

Entering/editing a name

§Change§ Press the display key.

~ Edit the name or enter a new

name (max. 25 characters) and

press §OK§.

You can delete the name

with Ñ.

Please note

uConnections to Gigaset.net are

always established via the Internet.

This is regardless of the send connec-

tion configured/selected on your

base.

uYou can open the Gigaset.net direc-

tory and establish connections, even

if you have not entered yourself in the

Gigaset.net directory.

Please note

If you select a Gigaset.net number from

the local directory, the connection is

automatically established via

Gigaset.net (Internet).

Using directories

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / directories.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

If there is no existing entry with this name in

the Gigaset.net directory, the name is saved.

A message to this effect is displayed. The

handset switches to idle status.

If there is already an entry with this name, or

the entered name contains impermissible

characters, you are requested to enter a dif-

ferent name.

If an entry was created successfully in the

Gigaset.net directory, the message "Saved"

is displayed.

Calling a Gigaset.net subscriber

You can call a Gigaset.net subscriber directly

via the Gigaset.net directory (see above) or

via their Gigaset.net number :

~ / s Enter the Gigaset.net number

(including the #9) or select it

from the local directory.

cPick up the receiver.

Every number ending with #9 is dialled via

Gigaset.net.

Data protection notice

If you enter a nickname at this point, it is

stored on a central Gigaset server. The

nickname appears in the Gigaset.net

directory, and other subscribers that use

the Gigaset.net service can call you using

this nickname.

By entering your data, you agree to

having your data saved. If you do not

wish this to happen, you can cancel the

operation at this point.

Further information about the

Gigaset.net service data saved can be

found at

www.gigaset.net/privacy-policy

Cancel operation:

Do not enter a name (or delete the name

currently entered) and press the display

key §Save§. You return to the hit list.

Or:

Press the red end key T twice to

return to the hit list.

Please note

uIf you delete the name, your entry is

deleted from the directory. You are no

longer "visible" to other Gigaset.net

subscribers. However, you can still be

reached via your Gigaset.net number.

For instructions on displaying the

number, ¢page 146.

uYou can also enter/edit your

Gigaset.net name via the Web config-

urator.

Making cost-effective calls

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / charges.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Making cost-effective

calls

Make phone calls through a network pro-

vider who offers cheap rates (call-by-call).

Using the Internet (VoIP) is the preferred

cost-effective way of making calls.

Defining dialling plans

You can also use your phone's cost control

function for calls to fixed line or mobile net-

works. In addition to your fixed line connec-

tion, you can open accounts with various

VoIP providers offering favourable rates for

calls to other networks. In the phone config-

uration, define the best connections

(account), e.g., for specific regional, national

and mobile network codes, to be used when

calls are made

(¢ Web configurator, Dialling Plans).

Or define the send connection to be used

when you actually dial the number (dialling

via line selection, ¢page 50).

Linking a number with a

call-by-call number

You can predial call-by-call numbers for calls

via your fixed line connection. Use the call-

by-call numbers to select the network of a

cost-effective provider for a call.

You can store the call-by-call numbers from

several network providers in the local direc-

tory (page 69).

To prefix a number with a call-by-call

number ("linking"), when the base is in idle

status:

sPress briefly to open the local

directory.

sSelect entry (call-by-call

number).

§Options§ Press the display key.

Display Number

Select and press §OK§.

The call-by-call number is shown on the dis-

play.

~c Enter the number and pick up

the receiver.

Or:

sPress briefly again to copy the

number from the local directory.

qSelect entry (¢page 70).

qIf there are several numbers

stored in the entry:

Select the number and

press §OK§.

cPick up the receiver. Both num-

bers are dialled.

Displaying call duration/

charges

The duration of each call appears in the dis-

play for all external calls

uDuring the conversation

uUntil approximately 3 seconds after

replacing the receiver.

Please note

The actual duration of the call can vary

from that shown by a few seconds.

E-mail notifications

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / email.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

E-mail notifications

Your phone will notify you when new e-mail

messages have been received on your

incoming e-mail server.

You can set your phone to periodically con-

nect to your incoming e-mail server and

check whether you have new e-mail.

Any new e-mail messages that have been

received are displayed on the base and on all

Gigaset handsets that have been registered:

you will hear an advisory tone, the message

key f will flash and the Ë icon will be

displayed in the idle display.

You can use your phone to connect to the

incoming e-mail server and display the

sender, date and time of receipt, subject

and text (abbreviated if necessary) for every

e-mail message in the incoming mail list

(¢page 83).

Prerequisites:

uYou have set up an e-mail account with

an ISP.

uThe incoming e-mail server uses the

POP3 protocol.

uYou have stored the name of the incom-

ing e-mail server and your personal

access data (account name, password)

in the phone via the Web configurator

(refer to the Web configurator user man-

ual on the enclosed CD).

Opening the incoming e-mail

list

v ¢ËMessaging ¢E-mail

Or if new e-mail messages have been

received (message key f flashes):

f ¢E-mail

The phone establishes a connection to the

incoming e-mail server. A list of e-mail mes-

sages that are stored there is displayed.

New unread messages appear above old

read messages. The most recent entry is at

the head of the list.

The following details are displayed for each

e-mail: name or e-mail address of the sender

(one line, abbreviated if necessary) and date

and time (date and time will only display cor-

rect values if sender and recipient are

located in the same time zone).

Example display:

1 E-mail address or name transmitted by the

sender (abbreviated if necessary)

Bold: New message.

All e-mail messages that were not present in

the incoming e-mail server when the inbox

was last opened are identified as "new".

All other e-mails are not marked, regardless

of whether or not they have been read.

2 Date and time of receipt of e-mail message

If the inbox on the incoming e-mail server is

empty, No entries will appear in the display.

Please note

If new e-mail messages have been

received, pressing the message key f

will display them in the E-mail list.

Incoming E-mail

Frank.Miller@mailp.com

07.14.11 3:40 pm

Happy Birthday

Anna Sand

07.14.11 10:38 am V

Read Delete

E-mail notifications

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / email.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Messages when establishing a

connection

The following problems may occur when

connecting to the incoming e-mail server.

The messages are displayed in the display

for a few seconds.

E-mail server

The connection to the incoming e-mail

server could not be established. This may

have the following causes:

– Incorrect entry for the name of

the incoming e-mail server

(¢ Web configurator).

– Temporary problems with the incom-

ing e-mail server (server is down or is

not connected to the Internet).

¤Check settings in the Web configura-

tor.

¤Try again later.

Currently not possible

The resources your phone requires to

make the connection are busy, e.g.:

– The permitted number of VoIP con-

nections has already been reached.

– One of the registered handsets is

currently connected to the incoming

e-mail server.

¤Try again later.

Error when logging in to the incoming

e-mail server. This may have the following

cause:

– The permitted number of VoIP con-

nections has already been reached.

– Incorrect entries for name of incoming

e-mail server, user name and/or pass-

word.

¤Check settings (¢ Web configurator).

Mailbox settings incomplete

Incomplete entries for name of incoming

e-mail server, user name and/or pass-

word.

¤Check/add to settings

(¢ Web configurator).

Viewing the message header

and text of an e-mail

Prerequisite: You have opened the incom-

ing mail list (¢page 83).

qSelect an e-mail entry.

§Read§ Press the display key.

The subject of the e-mail (maximum of

120 characters) and the first few characters

of the text are displayed.

Example display:

1Subject of the e-mail message. A maximum of

120 characters are displayed.

2 of the e-mail message (abbreviated if neces-

sary).

TPress the red end key to return

to the incoming message list.

Please note

Many e-mail providers activate spam

protection measures by default. E-mail

messages classified as spam are stored in

a separate folder and are therefore not

shown in the incoming mail list.

Some e-mail providers allow you to

deactivate spam protection or show

spam e-mails in the incoming mail list.

Other e-mail providers may send a

message to the inbox when a new spam

e-mail is received. This is to inform you

that a suspected spam e-mail has been

received.

The date and sender of this mail are

repeatedly updated, so that it is always

displayed as a new message.

E-mail

Subject:

Invitation

Hello Anna, I

passed my test!

From Delete

E-mail notifications

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / email.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

View e-mail sender's address

Prerequisite: You have opened the e-mail

notification to read it (¢page 84).

§From§ Press the display key.

The sender's e-mail address is displayed,

over several lines if necessary (maximum

60 lines).

§Back§ Press the display key to return to

the incoming message list.

Example:

Deleting e-mail messages

Prerequisite: You have opened the incom-

ing e-mail list (¢page 83) or the header or

sender's address for an e-mail is displayed

(¢page 84):

§Delete§ Press the display key.

§Yes§ Press the display key to confirm

the security prompt.

The e-mail is deleted from the incoming

e-mail server.

Please note

If the e-mail does not contain any stand-

ard text, the message E-mail can’t be dis-

played. will briefly appear.

E-mail

From:

Anna.Sand@mailp.com

Back Delete

Info centre – continuous Internet access from your phone

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / Info_Center.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Info centre – continuous

Internet access from

your phone

You can use your base to retrieve online con-

tent from the Internet i.e., request info serv-

ices that are provided specifically for the tel-

ephone. The info services available are con-

stantly updated. A default selection has

already been made, but you can change

these settings and add new services. Visit

the Gigaset.net page www.gigaset.net on

the Internet and compile your personal info

services.

Customising info services

¤Open the Web configurator page

Settings ¢Services ¢Info Services

on the PC (see user guide for the

Web configurator on the enclosed CD).

¤Click the link

gigaset.net/myaccount.

Or:

¤Enter the following address in the

address field of your PC's Web browser:

www.gigaset.net

¤Enter your Gigaset.net user ID and pass-

word on the Gigaset.net page. You will

find your user ID and password on the

Web configurator page specified above.

In both cases, a Web page is opened on

which you can compile your info services.

Starting the info centre,

selecting info services

v ¢Additional Features ¢Info Center

Your info centre menu i.e., a list of available

info services is displayed. You can navigate

between the info services.

sSelect the info service and

press §OK§.

To access certain info services (personalised

services), you have to log in with a user name

and password. In this case, enter your access

data as described in the "Login for person-

alised info services" section on page 87.

Messages when loading requested

information

The information is loaded from the Internet.

Wait a few seconds until the information is

displayed. The display shows Please wait....

If the information for an info service cannot

be displayed, one of the following messages

appears:

Requested page cannot be reached.

Possible causes of this are:

uTime limit exceeded (timeout) when

loading the information

uThe Internet server for the info services

cannot be accessed.

¤Check your Internet connection and

repeat the request at a later date.

Coding error on requested page.

The content of the requested info service is

coded in a format which the base cannot dis-

play.

Unable to show requested page.

General error when loading the info service.

Please note

You can launch the info centre and dis-

play info services with both the base and

with registered Gigaset SL78H, SL400H

and S79H handsets.

Info centre – continuous Internet access from your phone

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / Info_Center.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Authorization failed.

uYou have not entered your login data cor-

rectly.

¤Reselect the info service and repeat

the login process. Please remember

that data is case sensitive.

uYou are not entitled to access this info

service.

info services

If a special login process with user name and

password is required to access an info serv-

ice, the following is displayed after the serv-

ice has been called up:

User Name

Enter the user name supplied by

the provider of the info service.

§Save§ Press the display key.

Password Enter the password associated

with this user name.

§Save§ Press the display key.

If login was successful, the requested info

service is displayed.

If login failed, a message to this effect

appears on the display £Messages when

loading requested information (page 86).

Operating the info centre

Depending on the type of info service

requested, you can carry out the following

operations:

Scrolling within an info service

¤You can use s to scroll downwards

within an info service, and t to scroll up

(back).

Skipping back to the previous

page

¤Press the left display key.

Skipping back to the info centre

¤Briefly press the red end key T.

You want to go offline:

Press and hold the red end key T, the

base returns to idle status.

Selecting a hyperlink

Hyperlink to further information:

If the page contains a hyperlink to further

information, this is indicated by the g icon.

If a page with hyperlinks is opened, the first

hyperlink is highlighted.

¤Using the control keys (s and/or t) as

required, you can navigate to the hyper-

link that you would like to select. The

hyperlink is then highlighted by bars.

¤Press the right display key §Link§ to open

the relevant page.

Hyperlink to a phone number:

If a hyperlink contains a phone number, you

can copy the number to the local directory

or call the number directly (Click-2-Call func-

tionality).

¤Select the hyperlink using the s and/or

t keys, as required.

Please note

Please remember that login data is case

sensitive. For information on entering

text, ¢page 149.

Info centre – continuous Internet access from your phone

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / Info_Center.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

¤You can identify a hyperlink of this type

by the fact that §Call§ is shown above the

right display key.

¤Press the display key Ó to copy the

phone number to the local directory on

your base.

Or:

¤Press §Call§ to call the stored number.

Depending on the provider, if you press §Call§,

uThe number is dialled directly

uThe number appears first in the display, in

which case you must first confirm the

number before it is dialled.

¤If you press §Yes§, the number is dialled.

Or:

¤If you press §No§, the page is displayed

again with the hyperlink. The number

will not be dialled.

Entering text

¤If necessary, use q to navigate to the line

containing the field into which you want

to enter text. The cursor flashes in the text

field.

¤Enter the text using the keys on the base

(¢page 149).

¤If necessary, navigate to other text fields

to complete them or make a selection

(see below).

¤Press the right display key to complete

the entry and send the data.

Making selections

¤If necessary, use q to navigate to the line

in which you would like to make a selec-

tion.

¤Press left or right on the control key sev-

eral times to make the required selection.

¤Useqto navigate to other selection

fields and make your selection as

described above.

¤Press the left display key to complete the

selection and send the data.

Setting options

¤Use q to navigate to the line containing

the option. The line is highlighted.

¤Activate or deactivate the option via the

control key v (press right) or the left dis-

play key (e.g., §OK§).

¤If necessary, navigate to other options or

text fields to set or complete them.

¤Press the left display key (e.g., §Send§) to

complete the entry and send the data.

Displaying information from

the Internet as a screensaver

You can configure your base to display a cus-

tomised information feed (e.g., weather

reports, newsfeeds) in the device's idle dis-

play.

To do so, you must enable the Info Ticker

(¢page 119) or the Info Services

(¢page 118) screensaver on your base

and activate the display of info services via

the Web configurator.

The text information appears on the display

approx. 10 seconds after the base returns to

idle status.

Depending on the information feed

selected, a display key appears on the right

of the screensaver (e.g., §More§),

¤Press the right display key to call up fur-

ther information.

¤Press and hold the red end key T to

return to idle status.

Please note

The default setting is the weather report.

You can select the information to be dis-

played via the gigaset.net server

(¢page 86).

Operating the base's answering machine

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / answering_m.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Operating the base's

answering machine

You can operate the answering machine that

is integrated into the base using the keys on

the base (¢page 3), via a registered hand-

set or by remote operation (other phone/

mobile). You can only record own announce-

ment message or advisory message via the

base or a handset.

The base has three answering machines

(AM1, AM2, AM3), which can be activated

and used independently of each other.

Once the base has been set up, AM1 is acti-

vated and all base connections (lines) are

assigned to it as receive connections.

AM2 and AM3 are available once you have

assigned at least one receive connection to

them.

Each answering machine only receives calls

that are directed to its receive connections.

Each answering machine can only be oper-

ated via the end devices (base/handsets) to

which at least one of the machine's receive

connections is assigned.

Assigning receive connections

Prerequisite: At least two connections have

been configured on your base.

v ¢Ï Settings ¢Telephony

¢Receive Connections

Answer Machine 1/2/3

Select and press §OK§.

¤You can enter data as follows:

For each configured connection and the

Gigaset.net connection, an entry Receive

Calls for xxx (xxx = name of connection) is

displayed.

Make the following setting for every config-

ured base connection.

¤Select rYes if the answering machine

should accept calls made on the connec-

tion in question.

If the connection is already assigned to

another answering machine as a receive

connection, you cannot select Yes.

Select No, if the receive connection

should not be assigned to this answering

machine.

Parallel calls

If a caller is connected to an answering

machine and a second calls comes in for this

answering machine, the second caller will

hear the dialling tone. The call is signalled to

the devices (base, handsets) to which the

receive connection is assigned.

If the second call is not accepted, the

answering machine will accept this call if:

uThe connection with the first caller has

ended and

uThe set time period for the answering

machine to answer a call (¢page 95)

has expired.

Answering machine mode

You can use two different modes for each of

the three answering machines.

uIn Answer & Record mode, the caller

hears the announcement and can then

leave a message.

uIn Answer only mode, the caller hears

your announcement but cannot leave a

message.

Please note

If an answering machine is to accept calls

via the GSM connection on your mobile,

which itself is connected to the tele-

phone via Bluetooth, you must select the

GSM connection as the receive connec-

tion. The name of the mobile is displayed

for the GSM connection in the list of

known devices.

The times set for ring delay on the

mobile mailbox and answering machine

determine which of these will accept

calls.

Operating the base's answering machine

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / answering_m.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Operating via the base

The speaker activates automatically if you

receive an acoustic prompt or message

while operating. You can deactivate hands-

free modeby picking up the receiver.

Operation via the menu on the base is the

same as operation via a registered Gigaset

SL78H, SL400H or S79H handset.

Activating/deactivating and

setting answering machine mode

You can choose between Answer & Record,

Answer only and Alternating. By using the

Alternating setting, you can activate answer

and record mode for a set period of time;

outside this period the caller will only hear

the announcement.

v ¢Ì ¢Activation

The list of answering machines that share a

receive connection with the base is dis-

played. Activated answering machines are

marked with μ.

qIf necessary, select answering

machine.

§Change§ Press the display key.

¤You can enter data in the following fields:

Activation:

Select On or Off to activate/deactivate

the answering machine.

Mode:

Select Answer & Record, Answer only or

Alternating.

If Alternating mode is selected:

Record from:

Enter hours/minutes for the start of the

period in 4-digit format.

(The time must be set.)

Record until:

Enter hours/minutes for the end of the

period in 4-digit format.

§Save§ Press the display key.

When you switch the answering machine

on, the remaining memory time is

announced. If the time has not yet been set,

a corresponding announcement is made

(set time ¢page 123). The Ã icon is

shown on the display, as well as a digit for

the activated answering machine(s)

(e.g., Ã2, 3).

If the message memory is full and Answer &

Record or Alternating mode has been

selected, you will first be asked to delete old

messages. The answering machine is acti-

vated as soon as you have deleted old mes-

sages.

If there is no time available, the answering

machine changes from Alternating mode to

Answer & Record mode until the time is

available again.

Activating the answering machine via

the key on the base

¤Press the ý key to activate or deacti-

vate all answering machines that share a

receive connection with the base.

If several answering machines are assigned

to the base and these are not all deactivated,

proceed as follows:

1. Press the ý key:

All answering machines assigned to the

base are deactivated.

2. Press the ý key:

All answering machines are activated.

Operating the base's answering machine

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / answering_m.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Recording a personal

announcement/advisory message

The base is supplied with pre-recorded

announcements for answer and record

mode and for answer only mode. If a per-

sonal announcement has not been

recorded, the relevant pre-recorded

announcement is used.

You can record your own personal

announcement for answer and record mode

and answer only mode for each answering

machine.

v ¢Ì ¢Announcements

¢Record Announcemnt. /

Record Advisory Msg.

qIf necessary, select answering

machine and press §OK§.

§OK§ Press the display key to start the

recording.

If you have not picked up the receiver,

handsfree mode is activated.

You hear the ready tone (short tone).

¤Now say your announcement (at least

3 seconds).

§End§ Press the display key to end the

recording.

Use &, the red end key Tor §Back§ to

cancel recording and §OK§ to restart the

recording process.

After recording, the announcement is

played back for you to check. You can re-

record the announcement with §New§.

Please note:

uRecording ends automatically if the max-

imum recording time of 170 seconds is

exceeded or there is a break in speech for

more than 2 seconds.

uIf you cancel the recording, the default

announcement is used.

uThe recording is not started or cancelled

if the answering machine memory is full.

¤Delete old messages and the answer-

ing machine will automatically switch

back to Answer & Record mode.

¤Repeat recording if required.

Playing back announcements

v ¢Ì ¢Announcements

¢Play Announcement /

Play Advisory Message

qIf necessary, select answering

machine and press §OK§.

If you have not recorded a personal

announcement, the relevant pre-recorded

announcement is played.

Use &, the red end key Tor §Back§ to

stop playback.

Record a new announcement while playing

the announcement:

§New§ Press the display key.

If the answering machine's memory is full, it

will switch to Answer only mode.

¤Delete old messages and the answering

machine will automatically switch back

to Answer & Record mode. Repeat

recording if required.

Please note

You can use the base to manage the

announcements for all answering

machines with at least one receive con-

nection assigned. A registered handset

can only manage answering machines

that have at least one common receive

connection with the handset.

Operating the base's answering machine

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / answering_m.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Deleting announcements/advisory

messages

v ¢Ì ¢Announcements

¢Delete Announcemnt. /

Delete Advisory Msg.

qIf necessary, select answering

machine and press §OK§.

§Yes§ Press the display key to confirm

the prompt.

Once you have deleted your announcement

for the specified answering machine, the rel-

evant pre-recorded announcement is used

again.

Playing back messages

The date and time of each message is logged

(provided this has been set, ¢page 123)

and displayed during the playback. If Calling

Line Identification is activated, the caller's

number or name is displayed. If the caller's

number is saved in the directory, their name

is displayed. For more information about the

display ¢page 53.

Playing new messages

New messages that have not yet been

played back are indicated by the Ã icon in

the second display line and by the f key

flashing.

fPress the message key.

Answer Mach. 1: / Answer Mach. 2: /

Answer Mach. 3:

Select an answering machine

from the list and press §OK§.

Or:

üPress the play key.

qIf necessary, select an answering

machine and press §OK§.

Or:

v ¢Ì ¢Play Messages

qIf necessary, select an answering

machine and press §OK§.

Only the local answering machines that

share a receive connection with the base are

displayed.

The speaker on the base is activated.

If there are new messages, playback then

begins with the first new message. After the

last new message, you will hear the end tone

and an announcement stating how much

recording time remains.

If the message has been saved with the date

and time, you will hear an appropriate

announcement before playback begins.

All stored messages are played back regard-

less of the associated receive connection.

During playback, the entries in the answer-

ing machine list are shown on the display.

After the entry time and date have been

played back (after approx. 3 seconds), a new

message assumes the status "old".

Playing old messages

If there are no more new messages, you can

start playing older messages as described in

"Playing new messages" on page 92.

Stopping and controlling playback

During message playback:

2 / wStop playback. Press 2 / w

again to resume or

§Options§ Press the display key.

To continue select Continue

and press §OK§.

h (press and hold) or 

During time stamp playback:

Skip to previous message.

During message playback:

Skip to the start of the current

message.

h (briefly press) or 4

During time stamp playback:

Skip to previous message.

During message playback:

Repeat the last five seconds of

the current message.

s or 3Go to the next message.

If playback is interrupted for over a minute,

the answering machine returns to idle sta-

tus.

Operating the base's answering machine

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / answering_m.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Marking a message as "new"

A previously played back "old" message is

displayed as a "new" message again.

During message playback or pause:

*Press the star key.

Or:

§Options§ Open menu.

Mark as New

Select and press §OK§.

An announcement informs you of the mes-

sage's new status.

Playback of the current message is can-

celled. Playback of next message starts,

if applicable.

The f key on the handset flashes.

Copying the phone number from a

message to the directory

During playback or pause:

§Options§ ¢Copy to Directory

¤Complete the entry (¢page 73).

Deleting messages

You can either delete all old messages

together or individually.

Deleting all old messages

During playback or pause:

§Options§ ¢Delete Old List §OK§

§Yes§ Press the display key to confirm

the prompt.

Deleting an individual message

During playback or pause:

§Delete§ / QPress the display key or the Q

digit key.

You can only delete new messages once the

time stamp has been played back along with

the first few seconds of the message.

Accepting a call from the

answering machine

You can pick up a call while the answering

machine is recording or is being operated

via remote operation:

c§Accept§ / d

Pick up the receiver, press the

handsfree key or display key.

Recording stops and you can speak to the

caller.

If three seconds of the message have already

been recorded when you accept the call, the

message is saved. The f key flashes.

You can answer the call, even if it is not sig-

nalled.

Diverting an external call to the

answering machine

You can divert an incoming external call to

the answering machine.

It is only possible to divert a call, if:

uThe call comes in on a receive connection

that is assigned to one of the answering

machines

uThe answering machine to which the

receive connection is assigned is acti-

vated and not engaged with another call

uThere is sufficient memory available on

the answering machine

Prerequisite: An external call is signalled on

the base:

Calls to your analogue fixed line:

ÔSelect display key.

Calls to your connection or one of your VoIP

connections:

§Options§ Open menu.

Divert to AM

Select and press §OK§.

The answering machine starts immediately

in answer & record mode and records the

call. The set time for ring delay (page 95)

is ignored.

Operating the base's answering machine

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / answering_m.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Activating/deactivating two-way

record

You can record an external call with the

answering machine.

Prerequisite:

You are conducting an external call:

¤Inform the caller that the call is being

recorded.

§Options§ Open menu.

Two-way Record

Select and press §OK§.

Two-way record is indicated on the display

by an advisory text and is added to the

answering machine list as a new message.

§End§ Press the display key to stop

two-way record.

uIf the connection/MSN used for the call is

assigned to an answering machine as a

receive connection, the call is recorded

by this answering machine.

uIf the connection/MSN is not assigned to

an answering machine as a receive con-

nection, the call is recorded by Answer

Machine 1.

If the answering machine that is supposed to

record the call is busy with another call, the

message Currently not possible is displayed

and you will hear the end tone.

The maximum recording time depends on

the memory available on the answering

machine. If the memory is full, you will hear

an end tone, the recording is aborted, and

the call recorded up to that point is listed in

the answering machine list as a new mes-

sage.

Activating/deactivating call

screening

While recording a message, you can screen a

call via the base speaker or registered hand-

sets.

Permanently activating/deactivating

call screening

v ¢Ì ¢Call Screening

Desktop Phone

Select to activate/deactivate

call screening on the base

(³=on).

Handset Select to activate/deactivate

call screening on the registered

handsets (³=on).

§Change§ Select display key to activate/

deactivate the function.

Deactivating call screening for the

current recording

You can deactivate the function during the

recording.

On the base:

§Silence§ Press the display key.

Answering a call

d / cPress the handsfree key or pick

up the receiver.

Operating the base's answering machine

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / answering_m.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Setting the recording

parameters

The answering machine has already been

preset at the factory. You can adjust individ-

ual settings via the base or a registered

handset.

v ¢Ì ¢Recordings

¤You can enter data in the following fields:

Length:

Select maximum recording length 1 Min.,

2 Min., 3 Min. or Maximum.

Quality:

Select Excellent or Long Play recording

quality. If the quality is higher, the maxi-

mum recording time is reduced.

Ring Delay:

Select when the answering machine

should accept a call: Immediately, after

10 sec., 18 sec., 30 sec. or Automatic.

§Save§ Press the display key.

Information about ring delay

In Automatic mode, the following applies

for ring delay:

uIf there are no new messages, the answer-

ing machine answers a call after

18 seconds.

uIf new messages are present, the answer-

ing machine answers a call after 10 sec-

onds.

When operating remotely (¢page 95),

you can tell after approx. 15 seconds that

there are no new messages (otherwise the

answering machine would have already

accepted your call). There are no call charges

if you hang up now.

Please note:

You can configure your telephone so that

the first ringer is suppressed on all calls

(page 94). This means that the time set for

the ring delay predetermines how long the

caller must wait before the answering

machine accepts the call (not how long it

rings).

Changing the language for the

voice prompt and default

announcement

v Open the main menu.

*#Q5#2

Enter digits and press

Q§OK§ To set English.

§OK§ To set French.

2§OK§ To set Spanish.

Operating when on the move

(remote operation)

You can check and activate your answering

machine from any other telephone (hotel,

pay phone etc.).

Prerequisites:

uYou have set a system PIN other than

0000 (page 124).

uThe phone you are using for remote oper-

ation has tone dialling (DTMF) i.e., you

hear different tones when you press the

keys. Alternatively, you can use a code

transmitter (available from retailers).

uThe connection/MSN via which you call is

assigned to the answering machine as a

receive connection.

Please note

Remote operation via VoIP connections

is possible as long as DTMF signals are

transmitted (depending on the provider)

as SIP info messages, audible signals in

the voice channel (inband or audio) or as

special RTP data packets (pursuant to

RFC2833).

Operating the base's answering machine

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / answering_m.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Calling the answering machine and

playing messages

~ Dial your own number.

9~ When you hear your announce-

ment: Press 9.

The announcement is aborted.

~ Enter system PIN.

You are informed whether any new mes-

sages have been recorded. The messages are

now played back. You can now operate the

answering machine with the keypad.

The following keys are used for operation:

A During time stamp playback:

Skip to previous message.

During message playback:

Skip to the start of the current

message.

B Stop playback. Press again to

resume.

After a pause of approx. 60 sec-

onds, the connection is ended.

3 Go to the next message.

D Repeat the last five seconds of

the message.

0 During message playback:

Delete current message.

: Change the status of a previ-

ously played back message to

"new".

The next message starts to play.

The remaining memory is

announced at the end of the last

message.

Cancelling remote operation

¤Press the end call key or replace the

receiver.

Activating the answering machine

¤Phone home and let the phone ring

until you hear: "Please enter PIN"

(approx. 50 seconds).

~ Enter system PIN.

Your answering machine is activated. It tells

you how much memory is left.

The messages are played.

The answering machine cannot be deacti-

vated remotely.

If you enter an incorrect PIN or input is tak-

ing too long (more than ten seconds), the

connection is ended. The answering

machine will remain deactivated.

Please note

The answering machine will terminate

the connection under the following cir-

cumstances:

uAn incorrect system PIN has been

entered.

uThere are no messages in the answer-

ing machine.

uAfter the remaining memory has

been specified.

Using the network mailbox

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / Net-AB.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Using the network

mailbox

Some providers offer answering machines

on the network – network mailboxes.

Each network mailbox accepts incoming

calls made via the corresponding line (fixed

line or corresponding VoIP phone number).

To record all calls, set up network mailboxes

for the fixed line and for each of your VoIP

connections.

You must have requested the network mail-

box for your fixed line connection from your

network provider. You can store the number

of the network mailbox for the fixed line on

the base.

You can activate/deactivate the network

mailboxes for your VoIP connections using

your base, one of the registered handsets or

the Web configurator. To do this, you only

require the phone number of the network

mailbox.

Network mailbox: activating/

deactivating, entering

numbers

On your base, you can manage the network

mailboxes that are assigned to a receive con-

nection on this base.

v ¢ÌVoice Mail ¢Network Mailbox

The list of connections (VoIP and fixed line)

that are assigned to the base as receive con-

nections is displayed. Net AM: xxx is dis-

played, where xxx is replaced by the default

connection name (Net AM: IP1 to Net AM:

IP6, Net AM: Fixed Line or

Net AM: ISDN).

sIf several receive connections

are assigned to the base: Select

connection and press §OK§.

You have selected a VoIP connection:

¤You can enter data in the following fields:

Status

Select On to activate the network mail-

box. Select Off to deactivate.

Network Mailbox

The number that is currently stored for

the network mailbox is displayed.

Enter or change the phone number for

the network mailbox if necessary.

With some VoIP providers your network

mailbox phone number is downloaded

together with the general VoIP provider

data, saved to your base and displayed

under Network Mailbox.

¤Press the display key §Save§.

You have selected the fixed

line connection:

~Enter or change the phone

number for the network mail-

box if necessary.

§Save§ Press the display key.

You cannot activate/deactivate the network

mailbox for the fixed line connection via the

base. To activate/deactivate the network

mailbox for the fixed line connection, please

refer to information from the network pro-

vider.

Using the network mailbox

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / Net-AB.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Configuring an answering

machine for quick dial

You can use quick dial to make direct calls to

a network mailbox or the integrated base

answering machine.

Assigning key 1, changing

assignment

Quick dial settings are device-specific.

You can assign a different answering

machine to key  on the base and each

registered handset.

No answering machine is preconfigured for

quick dial in the default settings.

Press and hold key .

Or:

v ¢ÌVoice Mail

¢Set Key 1

The list of VoIP connections and the fixed

line connection assigned to the base as

receive connections is displayed. Net AM:

xxx is displayed, where xxx is replaced by

the default connection name (Net AM: IP1

to Net AM: IP6, Net AM: Fixed Line or

Net AM: ISDN).

This list contains the entry Answering

Machine for the local base answering

machines.

s Select entry and press §Select§

(Ø=on).

You have selected the local Answering

Machine:

Quick dial is immediately activated for the

local answering machines on the base.

TPress and hold red end key (idle

status).

You have selected a network mailbox:

If a number is already stored for this network

mailbox, quick dial is activated immediately.

TPress and hold red end key (idle

status).

If no number is saved for the network mail-

box, you are asked to enter the number of

the network mailbox.

s Jump to the Network Mailbox

line.

~Enter the number for the net-

work mailbox.

§Save§ Press the display key.

TPress and hold red end key (idle

status).

Quick dial is activated.

Calling the answering machine via

quick dial

Press and hold.

If you have set a network mailbox for quick

dial you are connected directly to this net-

work mailbox.

dIf necessary, press the handsfree

key.

You hear the network mailbox announce-

ment.

If you have set quick dial for the local

answering machine on the base, message

playback starts only if one answering

machine is assigned a receive connection for

the base. If multiple local answering

machines are assigned to the base, then a list

of answering machines will appear.

qSelect answering machine and

press §OK§.

Please note

You can only assign quick dial to one

answering machine.

You can also call the network mailboxes

for the base's receive connections

directly via the message key

(¢page 99).

Using the network mailbox

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / Net-AB.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Displaying new messages in the

handset's idle display

If a new message is present on one of the

network mailboxes assigned to the base via

its receive connection, or there is a new mes-

sage on the local answering machine, the

Ã icon and the number of new messages

are shown on the handset's idle display.

The f message key flashes.

Calling the network mailbox using

the message key

Under the message key f you will find a

list for each network mailbox that fulfils the

following prerequisites:

uThe corresponding connections are

assigned to the base as receive connec-

tions.

uThe network mailbox phone number is

saved on the base.

You can use the list to call the network mail-

box directly and listen to the messages.

fPress the message key.

The following is displayed (example):

1Mailbox: The network mailbox for the fixed

line or connection

2 If there are new messages in the network mail-

box, the list entry is shown in bold. The

number of new messages is shown in brackets

following the list entry.

3Mailbox IP 1:, Mailbox IP 2: and so on are the

network mailboxes for the VoIP connections.

"IP1", "IP2" and so on are the standard names of

the corresponding VoIP connections. The

standard names are always displayed regard-

less of which connection name you specified

during configuration.

4 If there are no new messages, no number is

shown after the list entry for the network mail-

box. The number of messages stored in the

network mailbox is not displayed.

Mailbox: / Mailbox IP 1: / Mailbox IP 2: /

... / Mailbox IP 6:

Select the network mailbox

entry and press §OK§.

You are connected directly to the network

mailbox and hear its announcement. Mes-

sages can generally be played back using

your base keypad (digit codes). Listen to the

announcement.

Messages & Calls

Mailbox: (1)

Mailbox IP 1: (1)

Mailbox IP 2:

Mailbox IP 3:

Mailbox IP 4: V

Back OK

Please note

uThe network mailbox is automatically

called via the corresponding connec-

tion. An automatic area code specific

to your phone is not prefixed.

uNetwork mailbox messages can gen-

erally be played back using your

phone's keypad (digit codes). For

VoIP, you need to define how the digit

codes should be converted to DTMF

signals and transmitted (see the user

guide for the Web configurator on the

enclosed CD).

Ask your VoIP provider which type of

DTMF transmission it supports.

100

ECO DECT: Reducing energy consumption and radiation

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / add_features.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

ECO DECT:

Reducing energy

consumption and

radiation

You are helping to protect the environment

with your Gigaset phone.

Reduced energy consumption

Your base has a power-saving adapter plug

and uses less power.

Reducing radiation

The radiation reduces automatically

depending on the distance of the registered

handsets to the base. The closer the hand-

sets are to the base, the lower the radiation.

You can reduce the radiation from the

handsets and the base even more by using

Eco mode.

Eco mode reduces radiation by 80% –

whether you are making a call or not.

Eco mode reduces the range by approx.

50%. Using Eco mode always makes sense

when a reduced range is sufficient.

Activate/deactivate Eco mode

v ¢Settings ¢Eco mode ¢Eco mode

§Change§ Press the display key (³=on).

Setting an appointment

(calendar)

You can use your base to remind yourself of

up to 30 appointments. Anniversaries

entered in the directory (¢page 73) are

automatically recorded in the calendar.

You can select whether the graphic calendar

should be displayed in idle status.

When the base is in idle status:

§Calendar§ Press the display key.

Or:

v ¢ÍOrganizer ¢ Calendar

Then:

§Options§ ¢Show Cal. in Idle

¤Press §Change§ to activate/deactivate the

function (³=on).

Saving an appointment

Prerequisite: The date and time have

already been set (page 123).

v ¢ÍOrganizer ¢ Calendar

uThe current day is selected (outlined in

orange).

uDays on which appointments have

already been saved are highlighted in

orange.

r / q Select the required day in the

graphical calendar.

To skip to the next/previous month, go to

the last/first day of the month being dis-

played and then press right/left (or up/

down) on the control key.

Please note

uActivating Eco mode reduces the

range of the base.

September 2011

Back Options

Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su

01 02 03 04 05

06 07 08 09 10 11 12

13 14 15 16 17 18 19

20 21 22 23 24 25 26

27 28 29 30 31

101

Setting an appointment (calendar)

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / add_features.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

The selected day is outlined in orange.

The current day is outlined in white.

After selecting the day:

w Press the centre of the control

key.

uIf appointments have already been

entered, this will open the list of saved

appointments on that day.

Use <New Entry> ¢§OK§ to open the

window and enter a new appointment.

uIf no appointments have been entered,

the input window will open immediately

to add the new appointment.

¤You can enter data in the following fields:

Activation:

Select On or Off.

Date:

Enter the selected date in this field.

Enter day/month/year in 8-digit format,

if necessary.

Time:

Enter hours/minutes in 4-digit format.

Text:

Enter text (max. of 16 characters). The

text appears as the appointment name in

the appointment list and is displayed on

the screen during the appointment

reminder. Text is preset as Appointment.

If Tex t does not contain any text, only the

date and time of the appointment are dis-

played.

Signal:

Select a melody with which the appoint-

ment should be signalled. If you select

Visual only, the appointment is only

shown on the display.

§Save§ Press the display key.

Signalling appointments and

anniversaries

In idle status, an appointment reminder is

signalled with the selected ringer melody

and will sound for 60 seconds. The name is

displayed for anniversaries, while the

entered text is displayed for appointments

along with the time.

You can deactivatean appointment

reminder:

§§Off§§ Press the display key to deacti-

vate the appointment reminder.

Please note

If you have already saved thirty appoint-

ments, you will have to delete an existing

appointment before adding a new one.

Please note

During a call, the appointment reminder

is signalled by a short tone.

It is entered in the missed alarms list.

ØÜ Appointment

3:38 am

Off

102

Setting an appointment (calendar)

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / add_features.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Managing appointments

v ¢ÍOrganizer ¢ Calendar

Editing individual appointments

r / q Select a day in the graphical

calendar and press the control

key w. (Days on which appoint-

ments/anniversaries have

already been saved are high-

lighted in orange in the calen-

dar).

A list containing the entries for this day is dis-

played. Anniversaries are marked with j,

activated appointments with μ.

q Select appointment/anniver-

sary.

§§View§§ Press the display key to view the

entry.

You can only display anniversaries. You can

edit an anniversary via the directory

(¢page 73).

With an appointment, select §Options§ for the

following options:

Edit Entry

(Similar to Saving an appointment

¢page 100)

Delete Entry

Delete a selected appointment from the

list.

Activate / Deactivate

Activate/deactivate an appointment.

A deactivated appointment is not sig-

nalled.

Deleting all appointments

In the monthly view:

§Options§ ¢Delete all appoint. ¢§OK§

Confirm the security prompt with §Yes§.

All appointments are deleted.

Displaying missed

appointments, anniversaries

Missed appointments/anniversaries

(page 73) are displayed in the Missed

Alarms list if:

uYou do not accept an appointment/anni-

versary.

uThe appointment/anniversary was sig-

nalled during a phone call.

The n icon and the number of new entries

are shown in the display. The most recent

entry is at the head of the list.

Open the list by pressing the message key

f(¢page 68) or via the menu:

v ¢ÍOrganizer ¢Missed Alarms

q Select appointment/

anniversary.

Information about the appointment/anni-

versary is displayed. A missed appointment

is shown with the appointment name

(¢page 101), a missed anniversary with

name and surname. The date and time is

also given.

§Delete§ Delete appointment

If 10 entries are already stored in the list, the

next appointment reminder will delete the

oldest entry.

103

Setting the alarm clock

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / add_features.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Setting the alarm clock

Prerequisite: The date and time have

already been set (page 123).

Activating/deactivating the alarm

clock and setting the wake-up time

v ¢ÍOrganizer ¢Alarm Clock

¤You can enter data in the following fields:

Status:

Select On or Off.

Time:

Enter the wake-up time in 4-digit format.

Occurrence:

Select Daily or Monday-Friday.

Volume:

Set the volume for the alarm (1–5) or cre-

scendo ring (volume increases with each

ring = ‡).

Signal:

Select the melody for the alarm.

§Save§ Press the display key.

In the idle display header, you see the ¼

icon and the wake-up time.

A wake-up call is signalled on the display

(¢page 4) and with the selected ringer.

The wake-up call sounds for 60 seconds.

If no key is pressed, the wake-up call is

repeated twice at five minute intervals and

then switched off.

During a call, the wake-up call is only sig-

nalled by a short tone.

Deactivating the wake-up call/

repeating after a pause

(snooze mode)

Prerequisite: A wake-up call is sounding.

§OFF§ Press the display key. The wake-

up call is deactivated.

§Snooze§ Press the display key or any key.

The wake-up call is deactivated

and then repeated after five

minutes. After the second repe-

tition the wake-up call is deacti-

vated completely.

104

Connecting/using other devices

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / HS_and_other_Devices.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Connecting/using other

devices

You can upgrade your base to a "PABX" by

connecting other communication devices.

You can register up to six handsets to your

base.

Each registered device is assigned an inter-

nal number (2–7) and an internal name

(INT 2–INT 7). You can change the number

assignment and names.

If all internal numbers have already been

assigned on your base, you must deregister

a handset that is no longer required before

registering a new one.

You can also connect an analogue fax

machine (¢page 114, ¢page 130) and

six Bluetooth devices (one headset and a

total of five GSM mobiles/data devices,

¢page 108).

Registering handsets

You must register a handset on the base (1)

and on the handset itself (2).

After registering successfully

Handset registered is shown on the base's

display.

Assigning send and receive

connections to the handset

If several connections are configured on the

base, the connection wizard for the handset

is started automatically. This enables you to

assign send and receive connections to the

handset. For information on the connection

wizard procedure see page 31.

1. On the base:

To set the base to registration mode:

v ¢Ï ¢Registration

¢Register Handset

The base's DECT interface is (assuming it is

deactivated) automatically activated as

soon as you set the base to registration

mode.

You can register the handset as long as the

display on the base shows the message

Please register your handset.

2. On the handset:

Within approx. 60 seconds.

¤Start the registration procedure on the

handset in accordance with the hand-

set's user guide.

You are asked to enter the current system

PIN of the base on your handset (default

setting: 0000).

~Enter the current system PIN

and press §OK§.

Please note

If six handsets are already registered to the

base (the internal numbers 2–7 are already

assigned), you have two options:

uThe handset assigned the internal

number 7 is in idle status:

The handset that previously had the

number 7 is deregistered; the new hand-

set is registered and is assigned the

internal number 7.

uThe handset assigned the internal

number 7 is in use:

The handset to be registered cannot be

registered. A message to this effect is

displayed on the handset.

105

Connecting/using other devices

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / HS_and_other_Devices.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Assigning the internal number

The base assigns the lowest free internal

number to the handset (possible numbers:

2–7). The internal number is shown on the

handset display e.g., INT 2. This means that

the handset has been assigned the internal

number 2. The base is assigned the internal

number 1.

De-registering handsets

On the base:

v ¢Ï ¢Registration

¢De-register Handset

The list of registered devices (internal par-

ties) is displayed.

sSelect the internal party you

wish to deregister and press §OK§.

~Enter the current system PIN if

necessary and press §OK§.

§Yes§ Press the display key to confirm

the prompt.

The handset is deregistered immediately,

even if it is not in idle status.

Locating a handset (paging)

You can use the base to search for the regis-

tered handsets.

Prerequisite: There are internal parties reg-

istered on the base. There are a maximum of

two connections between the internal par-

ties.

u Open the list of internal parties.

Your own entry in the list is

marked with a < symbol.

Find Handset

Select and press §OK§.

All reachable handsets ring simultaneously

("paging"), even if the ringers are deacti-

vated.

An external call will not interrupt the paging

process.

Ending paging

¤Press the red end key Tor pick up/

replace the receiver.

You can end the paging call prematurely by

pressing the talk or end call key on one of

the handsets.

The paging call ends automatically after

approx. 30 seconds.

Making internal calls

Internal calls using registered handsets are

free of charge.

Calling a specific handset

uInitiate internal call.

~Enter the number of the internal

party.

If the receiver is replaced, the base switches

to handsfree mode.

Or:

uInitiate internal call.

sSelect the internal party.

cPick up the receiver.

Please note

All base connections are assigned to a

handset as receive connections as soon as

registration is complete. If a mobile is regis-

tered via Bluetooth, its GSM connection is

also assigned to the handsets as a receive

connection.

When connection to the analogue fixed

line is established, this connection is

assigned to the handset as a send connec-

tion.

When connection to is established, the first

MSN to be configured is assigned as a send

connection; if no MSNs have been config-

ured, then the main number of the connec-

tion is used.

106

Connecting/using other devices

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / HS_and_other_Devices.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

If the internal party cannot be reached

(e.g., out of range) or does not answer,

or three internal connections are already

established, the busy tone sounds.

Calling all internal parties

("group call")

uPress and hold left on the con-

trol key.

All handsets are called.

Or:

u Initiate internal call.

*Press the star key.

Or:

u Initiate internal call.

Call All Select

cPick up the receiver.

All handsets are called.

If no internal parties can be reached or three

internal connections have already been

established, the busy tone sounds.

Ending a call

&Replace the receiver.

Transferring a call to a handset

You can transfer an external call to a handset

(connect).

Prerequisite: You are conducting an exter-

nal call.

u Open the list of handsets.

The external participant hears

music on hold, if activated

(¢page 122).

If more than one handset is registered:

sSelect a handset or Call All and

press §OK§.

When the internal participant answers:

¤If necessary, announce the external call.

& / TReplace the receiver or press the

red end key.

The external call is transferred to the other

handset.

If the internal participant does not answer or

the line is busy, press the display key §End§, to

return to the external call.

You can also replace the receiver before the

internal participant picks up when transfer-

ring the call.

Then, if the internal participant does not

answer or the line is busy, the call will auto-

matically return to you.

Initiating an internal consultation

call/conference

When you are conducting an external call,

you can call an internal participant at the

same time for consultation or hold a confer-

ence call between all three participants.

You are conducting an external call:

u Open the list of handsets.

The external participant hears

music on hold, if activated

(¢page 122).

sIf more than one handset is reg-

istered: select the handset and

press §OK§.

You are connected to the internal partici-

pant.

Either:

§Options§ ¢End Active Call

You are reconnected with the

external participant.

Or:

§Conf.§ Press the display key.

All three participants are con-

nected with each other.

If the internal participant does not answer:

¤Press the display key §End§ to return to the

first external caller.

Ending a conference call

An internal participant pressing the end call

key (on the handset) or the red end key T

does not affect the connection between the

other internal participant and the external

participant.

107

Connecting/using other devices

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / HS_and_other_Devices.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

External call waiting during an

internal call

If you receive an external call during an

internal call, you will hear the call waiting

tone (short tone). The caller's number or

name appears in the display if Calling Line

Identification is enabled.

You have the following options:

Rejecting the external call

§Reject§ Press the display key.

The call waiting tone is turned off.

You remain connected with the internal

participant.

If the call is via a VoIP or connection on the

base:

The external caller will hear the busy tone.

If the call is via the analogue fixed line con-

nection: The call continues to be signalled

on other registered handsets.

Accepting an external call/Putting an

internal party on hold

§Accept§ Press the display key.

You are connected to the external caller.

The internal call is placed on hold.

You have the following options:

uSwap between both participants:

¤Use q to swap between the partici-

pants.

uSpeak to both participants at the same

time:

¤Press the display key §Conf.§ to establish

the conference call. Press the display

key §EndConf§ to return to call swap

mode.

Ending an internal call

& / TReplace the receiver or press the

red end key.

The external call is signalled as an incoming

call on the base. You can accept the call

(¢page 52).

Internal call waiting during an

internal/external call

If an internal participant attempts to call you

while you are involved in an external or

internal call, this call is shown on the display

(internal call waiting). You can either accept

or reject this call.

Press any key to make this prompt disappear

from the display.

You must end the current call to accept the

internal call. Then the internal call is sig-

nalled as per usual. You can accept the call.

Changing the name of an

internal party

The names "INT 2", "INT 3" etc. are assigned

automatically at registration. You can

change these names. The name must be no

more than 10 characters. The modified name

will then appear in the list of internal partici-

pants.

uOpen list of internal partici-

pants.

sSelect handset.

§Options§ Open menu.

Rename

~Enter/edit name.

§Save§ Press the display key.

108

Connecting/using other devices

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / HS_and_other_Devices.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Changing the internal

number of an internal party

The base is assigned the internal number

INT 1 as a default setting.

A handset is automatically assigned the

lowest free internal number from 2–7 during

registration. If all numbers are in use, then

the number 7 is overwritten as long as this

handset is in idle status. You can change the

internal number of the base and all regis-

tered handsets (1–7).

uOpen the list of internal parties.

Your own device is marked

with <.

§Options§ Open menu.

Assign Handset No.

Select and press §OK§.

sSelect the internal party.

rSelect a new number.

sr Repeat the process for other

internal parties as required.

Make sure you do not assign an internal

number (1 to 7) twice.

To finish:

§Save§ Press the display key to save the

entry.

You will hear the error tone if an internal

number has been assigned twice.

¤Repeat the procedure with a free number.

Using Bluetooth devices

Your base can use Bluetooth™ to communi-

cate wirelessly with other Bluetooth devices.

You can use Bluetooth to register the follow-

ing devices on your base:

uOne Bluetooth headset

uUp to five Bluetooth GSM mobiles or data

devices (PC, PDA).

Before you can use your Bluetooth devices,

you must first activate Bluetooth and then

To use the phone numbers, dialling codes

(country and area code) must be stored on

the base (page 124).

You will find a description of how to operate

your Bluetooth devices in the user guides for

these devices.

Activating/deactivating Bluetooth

mode

v ¢òBluetooth

Activation Select and press §Change§ to acti-

vate or deactivate Bluetooth

mode (³ = activated).

When the base is in idle status, the ò icon in

the header indicates that Bluetooth mode is

activated (¢page 4).

As soon as Bluetooth is activated, your base

is visible to all Bluetooth devices in the

receiving range (maximum 10 m) and can

communicate with all of the devices

included in the "known devices" list.

Alternatively, you can assign Bluetooth inter-

face activation to a display or function key

on the base (¢page 116). This then allows

you to activate/deactivate Bluetooth at the

push of a button.

Please note

Numbers 1 to 7 are available for selection.

Internal number 8 is reserved for any fax

machine connected to the FAX port.

109

Connecting/using other devices

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / HS_and_other_Devices.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Registering Bluetooth devices

To register a Bluetooth device, you need to

search for it and then add it to the list of

known devices.

The list of known devices can hold a maxi-

mum of one headset and five data devices/

mobiles.

Searching for Bluetooth devices

The distance between the base in Bluetooth

mode and the activated Bluetooth device

(headset, mobile or data device) should be

no more than 10 m.

Any incoming calls are ignored during the

search.

v ¢òBluetooth ¢Search for Headset

/ Search for Cell Phone /

Search for Data Device

Bluetooth mode is activated automatically

on the base if it is not already active. The

search is started. This can take up to

30 seconds.

The Bluetooth names of the devices found

are displayed in a list (abbreviated if neces-

sary). If no name has been assigned to a

device, the device address is shown.

Cancelling/repeating current search

Cancel the search:

§Cancel§ Press the display key.

Repeat search if necessary:

In the known devices list:

§Options§ Press the display key.

Repeat Search

Select and press §OK§.

Displaying the name and address of

a device found

In the list of devices found:

sSelect entry.

§View§ Press the display key.

The device name and address are displayed.

Press §OK§ to return to the list.

Adding the data device/mobile to the

known devices list

In the list of devices found:

q Select the device to be regis-

tered.

§Options§ Press the display key.

Trust Device

Select and press §OK§.

If the list of known devices contains fewer

than five data devices and mobiles:

~Enter a PIN of your choice or the

PIN of the Bluetooth device to

be registered and press §OK§.

Generally you can enter a PIN of your choice

for a data device/GSM mobile. You must also

enter this PIN in the data device/mobile

(handshake).

The device is saved in the list of known

devices.

If the list of known devices already contains

five data devices/mobiles, then the PIN

prompt is preceded by the message Select

device to be replaced and trust again.. You

must select a device from the list to be

replaced by the new device before registra-

tion.

Please note

uIf you register a headset, any headset

that is already registered will be over-

written.

uIf you would like to use a headset

already registered to another device

(e.g., a mobile) with your base, please

deactivate this connection before

you start the registration process.

uDepending on the Bluetooth profiles

supported by your mobile, it can be

registered as a data device and a

mobile.

Please note

The Search for Data Device function will

list all Bluetooth devices found with the

exception of headsets (list includes

multi-service devices).

110

Connecting/using other devices

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / HS_and_other_Devices.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

¤If you press the display key §No§, the device

is not registered and the base returns to

the list of found devices.

¤If you wish to replace a device in the list,

press the display key §Yes§. A list of the reg-

istered (known) data devices and mobiles

is displayed.

¤Select the device to be replaced and

press the display key §OK§.

You will need to enter a PIN to register the

new device (see above).

If the new device fails to register, the list of

known devices will remain unchanged.

Adding a headset to the known

devices list

In the list of devices found:

q Select headset.

§Options§ Press the display key.

Trust Device

Select and press §OK§.

If the headset transfers the PIN 0000 (the PIN

usually set on a headset), the headset is

directly added to the list of known devices. A

previously registered headset is automati-

cally de-registered.

If the headset transfers a PIN other than

0000, you are asked to enter the PIN on the

base.

~Enter the PIN and press §OK§.

The device is saved in the list of known

devices.

Editing the list of known (trusted)

devices

Open list

v ¢òBluetooth

Known Devices

Select and press §OK§.

The list of known devices is displayed.

The names in the list are accompanied by

icons with the following meanings:

When a Bluetooth device is registered, all

Bluetooth profiles supported by this device

are saved (not just the profile that was

searched for).

This means, for example, that a registered

mobile can be saved as a data device and a

mobile in the list of known devices. Its name

is preceded by two icons: l and õ. You can

therefore use this Bluetooth connection to

access the mobile's GSM line and also to

exchange vCards with the mobile. The nego-

tiated PIN is valid for all types of Bluetooth

communication.

Viewing entries

Open the list ¢s(select entry)

§View§ Press the display key.

The device name and address are displayed.

Go back with §OK§.

De-registering Bluetooth devices

Open the list ¢s(select entry)

§Options§ Press the display key.

Delete Entry

Select and press §OK§.

Bluetooth is activated, if neces-

sary.

Please note

uThe known devices list can only con-

tain one Bluetooth headset. If you

one is deleted from the list.

uA multi-service device can be regis-

tered as a headset and a data device.

Icon Meaning

ô Bluetooth headset

õ Bluetooth data device

lBluetooth mobile

111

Connecting/using other devices

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / HS_and_other_Devices.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Entering/editing the name of a

Bluetooth device

Open the list ¢s(select entry)

Either:

§Options§ Press the display key.

Rename Select and press §OK§. Bluetooth

is activated, if necessary.

Or:

§View§ Press the display key.

§Edit§ Press the display key.

Then:

~Enter/edit name.

§Save§ Press the display key.

The name is changed locally on the base. It is

not changed on the Bluetooth device.

Activating a registered mobile

You can register up to five mobiles via Blue-

tooth. However, only one mobile can con-

nect to the base: the activated mobile.

Activated means:

uIf the base is in Bluetooth mode, the

mobile can establish a Bluetooth connec-

tion with the base (e.g., in the event of an

incoming call).

uThe base establishes a connection with

this mobile when attempting to make a

call via a GSM connection.

Once registration is complete, the last

mobile to be registered is activated auto-

matically. The previously activated mobile is

deactivated.

You can activate any other mobile from the

list of known devices.

Open list ¢s(select mobile)

§Options§ Press the display key.

Connect Cell Phone

Select and press §OK§.

Bluetooth is activated on the base if it is not

already active. The base connects to the

mobile.

The selected mobile is activated. Its entry in

the list of known devices is marked with μ.

The previously activated mobile is deacti-

vated.

Display in the base's idle display

If a headset or Bluetooth mobile is con-

nected to the base, the corresponding icon

(ô, l) together with ò(= Bluetooth acti-

vated) is shown in the display header.

Rejecting/accepting an

unregistered Bluetooth device

If a Bluetooth device that is not registered in

the list of known devices tries to connect

with the base, you are prompted on the dis-

play to enter the PIN for the Bluetooth

device (bonding).

uReject

TBriefly press the red end key.

uAccept

~Enter the PIN for the Bluetooth

device you want to accept and

press §OK§.

If you accept the device, you can use it

temporarily (i.e., as long as it is within

receiving range and Bluetooth is acti-

vated) or add it to the list of known

devices.

Following PIN confirmation:

¤Press the display key §Yes§ to add the

device to the list of known devices.

Or:

¤Press the display key §No§ to use the device

temporarily.

Please note

uIf you de-register an activated Blue-

tooth device, it may try to reconnect

as an "unregistered device".

uIf you de-register the activated

mobile (¢page 110), no other

mobile from the list will be activated.

112

Connecting/using other devices

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / HS_and_other_Devices.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Changing the Bluetooth name of

the base

You can change the base name used to iden-

tify it on the display of another Bluetooth

device.

v ¢òBluetooth ¢Own Device

The device name and address for the base

are displayed.

§Change§ Press the display key. Bluetooth

is activated, if necessary.

~Change the name.

§Save§ Press the display key.

Using a Bluetooth headset

Setting the Headset function key

If you want to make calls on your base via a

headset, you must first assign a function key

on the base to the Headset function

(¢page 116).

Accepting/transferring calls on the

headset

Prerequisite: Bluetooth is activated; a con-

nection has been established between the

Bluetooth headset and the base

(¢page 108).

uYou are talking on the base or

uYou are trying to connect to another

party or

uA call is being signalled on the base

¤Press the Headset function key on the

base to accept the call on the headset.

Calling

¤Enter the phone number on the base and

press the Headset function key on the

base.

Using data devices

Prerequisite: Bluetooth is activated.

The data device is in the list of known

devices (marked with õ, ¢page 109)

or temporarily connected to the base

(¢page 111).

You can establish a Bluetooth connection to

the base using a PC, PDA or even a mobile (as

a data device).

You can then, for example, exchange direc-

tory entries with the data device in the form

of vCards, compare the PC's directory with

the directory on the base, load ringer set-

tings or screensavers from the data device to

the base's resource directory or use AT com-

mands to make outgoing calls and accept

incoming calls.

The phone is supplied with QuickSync soft-

ware for the PC (¢page 150). You will find

it on the enclosed CD.

QuickSync provides PC functions via a

graphical interface.

Please note

uIf you only accept the registration of a

headset on a temporary basis, the

headset is not deleted from the

known devices list.

uIf the list of known devices already

contains five data devices/mobiles,

you will be asked to delete a device

from the list first (¢page 109).

Please note

uYou can operate headsets on your

handset that have the headset or

handsfree profile. If both profiles are

available, the handsfree profile is used

to communicate.

uCalls can only be initiated from the

base.

Recommendation

If your headset has a push-to-talk key, we

recommend that you use the Headset

function key for transfer/pickup as well.

Please note

For instructions on adjusting the speak-

ing volume on your headset,

¢page 119.

113

Connecting/using other devices

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / HS_and_other_Devices.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Using GSM mobiles (Link2mobile)

You can conduct calls on your base and/or a

registered handset via the GSM connection

on your Bluetooth GSM mobile (call external

parties via the GSM connection on the

mobile or accept calls via the GSM connec-

tion) if the following prerequisites are met:

uBluetooth mode is activated on the base

and mobile (¢page 108).

uYour GSM mobile has been registered

(¢page 109) on the base and activated

(¢page 111).

uThere is a Bluetooth connection estab-

lished between the base and mobile.

uThe mobile is in range of the base (less

than 10 m).

uFor outgoing calls: The mobile connec-

tion is assigned to the base as a send

connection, or the base can select the

GSM connection as a send connection

(¢page 128).

uFor accepting incoming calls: The GSM

connection is assigned to the base as a

receive connection (¢page 128).

A connection is automatically established

between the base in Bluetooth mode and

the activated mobile in range:

uIf a call arrives via the mobile's GSM con-

nection (¢page 53)

uIf you attempt to make a call on the base

via the GSM connection (¢page 51)

If Bluetooth mode is deactivated on the

base:

¤Open the list of known devices.

¤Select the activated mobile (marked

with μ).

¤Press the display key §Options§.

¤Select Connect Cell Phone and press §OK§.

Bluetooth is activated on the base. The base

connects to the mobile.

Simultaneous Bluetooth

connections

Your base can connect to both a headset and

a data device/mobile via Bluetooth at the

same time.

However, please note the following:

uThe Bluetooth menu cannot be opened

on the base.

uYou can use the headset and at the same

time use a mobile/data device to initiate,

accept or manage a call.

uYou cannot use the headset while trans-

ferring data via Bluetooth.

Please note

For instructions on sending vCards to a

Bluetooth device or receiving them from

a Bluetooth device, see page 72.Please note

uYou can also assign this function to a

function key on the base,

¢Connect Cell Phone on

page 116.

uIf the mobile is taken beyond the

Bluetooth range of the base, you

should re-establish the connection

between the two as soon as the

mobile is within range again. This will

ensure that a GSM call either to the

base or from the base using the GSM

connection is transferred.

Establishing a manual connection:

¤Select the mobile from the list of

known devices.

¤Select §Options§ ¢Connect Cell

Phone and press §OK§.

Or:

¤Press the function key Connect

Cell Phone.

114

Connecting/using other devices

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / HS_and_other_Devices.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Connecting a fax machine

You can connect an ITU-T Group 3 fax

machine to the base via the FAX port.

1. Insert one end of the fax connection ca-

ble from the rear into the recess in the

housing.

2. Plug the jack into the fax port on the base

(labelled: FAX).

3. Connect the fax connection cable to the

port on the fax machine.

You do not explicitly have to register the fax

machine to the base. It is automatically "reg-

istered", once you activate the FAX port on

the base (¢page 130, default setting is

"off").

Once the FAX port is switched on, the fax

machine is added to the list of internal par-

ties with the internal name INT 8.

The fax machine is assigned all of the base's

numbers as receive connections. The first

number from the configuration is assigned

as a send connection. You can change the

assignment (¢page 128).

Please note

When connecting a multifunction device

(fax/phone) to the FAX port, you must

observe the following:

uThere is no ringing tone when you

pick up.

uCLIP (¢page 53) is not supported

for incoming calls.

uIf the answering machine takes a call

on the device's receive connection, it

continues to ring.

uIf the device's receive connection is

assigned neither to the base nor a

handset, calls are not transferred to

the call lists.

uInternal functions such as "internal

consultation call during an external

call" or "internal transfer" are not sup-

ported.

Please note

If a number is only assigned to the fax

machine as a receive connection, then

calls to this number will not be entered in

the call lists (it is not possible to read the

entries from the base or a handset).

115

Connecting/using other devices

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / HS_and_other_Devices.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Connecting and using a

wire-bound headset

You can connect a headset to the base using

a 2.5 mm jack connector.

For details about your headset, see the

accompanying user guide.

Connecting the headset

¤Before you connect the headset, assign

the Headset function to a function key on

the base (¢page 116).

¤Next, plug the jack connector on your

headset into the connection socket on

your base (¢page 12).

Accepting/transferring calls on the

headset

Prerequisite:

uYou are talking on the base or

uYou are trying to connect to another

party or

uA call is being signalled on the base

¤Press the function key Headset on the

base to accept the call on the headset.

Calling

¤Enter the phone number on the base and

press the Headset function key.

Please note

uYou should still use the Headset func-

tion key if your headset has a P2T key.

uFor instructions on adjusting the

speaking volume on your headset,

¢page 119.

uIf a Bluetooth headset is also regis-

tered with the base and it is in range,

the call/connection is transferred to

the Bluetooth headset. The Bluetooth

headset takes priority.

116

Setting up the base

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / settings.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Setting up the base

Your base is preconfigured but you can

change the settings to suit your individual

requirements.

The settings described in this chapter only

have a local effect on the base. The corre-

sponding setting on any of the registered

handsets does not change.

Accessing functions and

numbers quickly

You can program the six function keys on the

right-hand side of the base and the display

keys (in idle status). You can assign a phone

number (quick dial) or a base function to

each of these keys and change the assign-

ment.

The number is then dialled or the function

started by simply pressing a key.

Changing key assignments

In idle status:

¤Press and hold the display/function key

until a list of possible key assignments is

displayed.

The following functions are available:

Quick Dial

Assign a number from the local directory

to the key.

The directory is opened.

¤Select an entry and press §OK§.

If you delete or edit the entry in the direc-

tory, this will not affect the assignment to

the function key or display key.

This means that if the phone number

changes, you must re-assign the updated

entry from the directory to the key as

described above.

Alarm Clock

Assign menu for setting and activating

the alarm clock to a key (¢page 103):

v ¢ÍOrganizer ¢Alarm Clock

Calendar

Open calendar/enter new appointment

(¢page 100):

v ¢ÍOrganizer ¢ Calendar

Bluetooth

Activate/deactivate Bluetooth mode

(¢page 108).

Connect Cell Phone

Activate Bluetooth on the base and

establish a connection to the active

Bluetooth mobile (¢page 111).

Headset

Accept or pick up a call with the con-

nected headset. The key simulates the

P2T function (push-to-talk). You must

assign Headset to a key if you wish to use

a headset without P2T (wire-bound or via

Bluetooth).

Press the key

– If a call is signalled on the base and

you wish to accept the call directly on

the headset.

– To continue a call on the headset that

has been started on the base.

If two headsets are connected to the

base, a wire-bound and a Bluetooth

headset, the Bluetooth headset takes pri-

ority. In that case you cannot use the

wire-bound headset.

Insert P

Key inserts a dialling pause (a P) when

entering a number (¢page 134).

117

Setting up the base

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / settings.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

R Function

Analogue fixed line: Key inserts a recall

(an R) when entering a number

(¢page 134).

VoIP connections: You can assign the

R function via the Web configurator

(Web page Advanced Settings):

– Connect two external callers with one

another (after a consultation call,

when call swapping)

– With a provider-specific feature for the

VoIP connection

Refer to the Web configurator's user

guide on the enclosed CD.

More Functions...

More features are available:

uSend Connection

Assign an alternative send connection to

a key.

¤Select an MSN from the MSN list as

(another) send connection for the

base and press §OK§.

Press this display or function key if the

alternative send connection should be

used (temporarily) for the subsequent

call (instead of the send connection for

the base).

uLine Selection

Assign the list of configured connections

to a key.

Select the send connection for the next

call from the list (¢page 50).

uCall Lists

Assign the call list menu to a key

(¢page 66).

v ¢ÊCall Lists

uWithhold Number

Withhold Calling Line Identification for

the next call (¢page 61).

uCall Divert

Assign menu for setting and activating/

deactivating call divert to a key

(¢page 58):

Prerequisite: The VoIP provider supports

call divert.

v ¢ÇSelect Services ¢Call Divert

uE-mail

Opens the e-mail submenu for receiving

and reading e-mail notifications

(¢page 83):

v ¢ËMessaging ¢E-mail

Info Center

Start Info Centre and open the list of

available information services

(¢page 86):

v ¢Additional Features

¢Info Center

Display key assignment: The selected func-

tion or the corresponding directory name

for the phone number (or its abbreviation if

necessary) is displayed in the lowest display

line above the display key.

Function key assignment: You can make a

note of the key assignment on the insert

strip next to the respective key.

Starting the function, dialling the

number

When the base is in idle status:

¤Briefly press the function or display key.

Depending on the key assignment:

uA number (Quick Dial) is dialled directly.

uMenu or function list is opened.

118

Setting up the base

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / settings.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Changing the display

language

You can view the display texts in different

languages.

v ¢ÏSettings ¢Language

The current language is indicated by a Ø.

sSelect a language and

press §Select§.

The selected language is set immediately.

If you accidentally choose a language you do

not understand:

v*#Q3#

Press keys in sequence.

sSelect the correct language.

§Select§ Press the right display key.

Setting the display

Setting the screensaver/slideshow

You can display a screensaver when the base

is in idle status.

You have the following options:

uA picture from the Screensavers folder in

the Resource Directory (¢page 122)

uAll pictures from the Screensavers folder

in the Resource Directory displaying one

after the other in the form of a Slideshow

uDate and time as a digital display

(Digital Clock)

uAnalogue time

(Analog Clock – clock-hand display)

uInformation from an info service (Info

Services – weather information, horo-

scope etc.). You must have activated the

display of info services via the Web con-

figurator.

The base must be connected to the Inter-

net to display info services.

The type of info service available to your

base is set on the Internet on the

Gigaset.net server. You can change the

settings via your PC web browser

(see user guide for the Web configurator;

Info Services).

If no information is currently available,

the digital time (Digital Clock) is dis-

played instead until information is availa-

ble again.

Together with the information, display

keys that open the Info Centre selection

menu can be shown.

The screensaver replaces the idle status dis-

play. It will conceal the calendar, date, time

and name.

The screensaver is not displayed in certain

situations e.g., during a call and when a sta-

tus message is displayed.

If a screensaver is activated, the Screensaver

menu option is marked with ³.

v ¢ÏSettings ¢Display

¢Screensaver

The current setting is displayed.

¤You can enter data in the following fields:

Activation:

Select On (screensaver is displayed) or

Off (no screensaver).

Selection:

Select screensaver with r or

§View§ Press the display key. The active

screensaver is displayed.

s Select screensaver and

press §OK§.

§Save§ Press the display key.

The screensaver is activated approx. 10 sec-

onds after the display has changed to idle

status.

If the screensaver conceals the display,

briefly press the red end key T to show

the idle display.

119

Setting up the base

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / settings.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Activating/deactivating the info

ticker

You can display text information from the

Internet (weather information etc.) that is set

for the screensaver Info Services as a scroll-

ing message in the idle display. The scrolling

message is shown in the bottom line of the

idle display (immediately above the display

keys). The end of one set of information and

beginning of the next are separated by

"+++".

If, for example, you have set the calendar to

be shown in the idle display, the information

ticker overwrites the last two lines (weeks) of

the calendar.

v ¢ÏSettings ¢Display

¢Info Ticker (³= on)

The ticker starts as soon as the telephone

changes to idle status. If, however, a mes-

sage is shown in the idle display, the infor-

mation ticker is not displayed.

Setting the brightness and time

control for the display backlight

You can set the brightness of the display on

your base and specify a timeframe during

which the display is completely deactivated

e.g., at night.

If the display backlight is deactivated, it can

be reactivated by pressing any key or by an

incoming call. The display backlight is deac-

tivated again after approx. 30 seconds after

the last press of a key.

v ¢ÏSettings ¢Display

¢Backlight

The current setting is displayed.

¤You can enter data in the following fields:

Time Control

Prerequisite: The date and time have

already been set.

Select On or Off.

The following fields are displayed when

Time Control = On.

Display off from:

Enter the time in 4-digit format when the

backlight should be deactivated in idle

mode.

Display off until:

Enter the time in 4-digit format when the

backlight should be reactivated.

Brightness:

Set the brightness of the display back-

light with r.

You can select from five brightness levels

(1 = low – 5 = very bright; e.g., brightness

level 3 = Š).

¤Press the display key §Save§.

Changing the handsfree/

receiver volume

You can set the handsfree volume and the

receiver volume, as well as the volume of a

connected wire-bound headset to five dif-

ferent levels.

In idle status

v ¢ÏSettings ¢Audio Settings

¢Call Volume

You will hear a test tone.

r Set the receiver volume.

sScroll to the Speaker: line.

r Set the handsfree volume.

§Save§ Press the display key to save the

setting.

During a call

You can adjust the volume during a call

using the R and S keys. Each time

you press the key, the volume will increase or

decrease by one level.

§Save§ Press the display key if neces-

sary to save the setting perma-

nently.

120

Setting up the base

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / settings.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Setting ringers

Setting the volume

You can choose between five volumes (1–5;

e.g., volume 3 = Š) and the "crescendo"

ringer (6; volume increases with each ring =

‡).

You can set different volumes for the follow-

ing functions:

uFor Internal Calls and Appointments

(Appointments ¢page 100)

uFor external calls

v ¢ÏSettings ¢Audio Settings

¢Ringer Settings ¢Volume

rIf necessary, set the volume for

internal calls and appointment

notification.

sScroll to the next line.

rIf necessary, set the volume for

external calls.

§Save§ Press the display key to save the

setting.

When choosing the setting, the ringer will

sound in the volume currently selected.

Setting the ringer melody

You can select various ringers, melodies or

any sound from the resource directory

(page 122).

You can set different ringers for the follow-

ing functions:

uFor Internal Calls

uFor external calls to each individual

receive connection on the base

(Fixed line or MSN1 to MSN10, IP1 to IP6,

Gigaset.net)

uFor external calls to the GSM connection

of a mobile registered via Bluetooth

(¢page 108); the Bluetooth name of

the mobile is shown subsequently for the

GSM connection

In idle status:

v ¢ÏSettings ¢Audio Settings

¢Ringer Settings ¢Melodies

qSelect For Internal Calls or a

receive connection.

rSelect the melody for this con-

nection.

sr Where necessary, select the

next connection and set a mel-

ody etc.

§Save§ Press the display key to save the

settings.

Or:

You can set the ringer melody so it is used for

both internal and all external calls.

qSelect All calls.

rSelect melody.

§Save§ Press the display key.

§Yes§ Press the display key to confirm

the settings.

The setting for all calls will not work as soon

as you change the setting for an individual

connection.

Please note

You can also use the R and Skeys

to change the volume while an incoming

call is being signalled on the base.

Please note

You can only set ringer melodies on the

base for receive connections assigned to

the base.

121

Setting up the base

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / settings.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Setting time control for external

calls

You can specify a time period when you do

not want the base to signal external calls

e.g., during the night.

Prerequisite: The date and time have

already been set.

v ¢Ï ¢Audio Settings

¢Ringer Settings ¢Time Control

¤You can enter data in the following fields:

For external calls:

Select On or Off.

The following fields only appear when For

external calls = On.

Suspend ring from:

Enter the start of the period in 4-digit for-

mat.

Suspend ring until:

Enter the end of the period in 4-digit for-

mat.

¤Press the display key §Save§.

Silencing the ringer for

anonymous calls

You can set the base to not ring when exter-

nal callers cannot be identified (anonymous

call).

v ¢ÏSettings ¢Audio Settings

¢Ringer Settings

Anon. Call Silencing

Select and press §Change§.

If the ringer is silenced for anonymous calls,

then Anon. Call Silencing is marked

with ³.

Activating/deactivating the ringer

You can deactivate the ringer on your base

before you answer a call or when the base is

in idle status; the ringer can be deactivated

permanently or just for the current call.

The ringer cannot be re-activated while an

external call is in progress.

Deactivating the ringer permanently

*Press and hold the star key.

The ó icon appears in the display.

Reactivating the ringer

*Press and hold the star key.

Deactivating the ringer for the

current call

§Silence§ Press the display key.

Activating/deactivating alert tones

In place of the ringer, you can activate an

alert tone. When you receive a call, you will

hear a short tone ("Beep") instead of the

ringer.

*Press and hold the star key and

within 3 seconds:

§Beep§ Press the display key. A call will

now be signalled by one short

alert tone.

ñ appears in the display.

Please note

During this period, you will continue to

receive calls on the base from numbers

to which you have assigned a personal-

ised melody in the directory (VIP).

122

Setting up the base

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / settings.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Activating/deactivating

advisory tones

Your handset uses advisory tones to tell you

about different activities and statuses. The

following advisory tones can be activated/

deactivated independently of each other:

uKey click: every key press is confirmed.

uAcknowledge tones:

–Confirmations (ascending tone

sequence): At the end of an entry/set-

ting and when a new entry arrives in

the answering machine list or call list

–Error tone (descending tone

sequence): When you make an incor-

rect entry

–Menu end tone: when scrolling to the

end of a menu

In idle status:

v ¢ÏSettings ¢Audio Settings

¢Advisory Tones

¤You can enter data in the following fields:

Key Tones:

Select On or Off.

Confirmation:

Select On or Off.

§Save§ Press the display key.

Activating/deactivating

music on hold

Music on hold is played e.g., during a call

swap or consultation call to a caller with

whom you are not actively connected.

v ¢ÏSettings ¢Audio Settings

¢Music on Hold

¤Press the display key §Change§ to activate or

deactivate music on hold (³= on).

Resource directory

The resource directory manages sounds/

melodies, which you can use as ringers, and

pictures (CLIP pictures and screensavers),

which you can use as caller pictures or as

screensavers. Prerequisite: Calling Line Iden-

tification (CLIP). The resource directory can

manage the following media types:

Your base has a variety of default sounds and

pictures.

You can play the available sounds and view

the pictures.

You can download some pictures and

sounds from a PC with the Gigaset Quick-

Sync software (¢page 150). If there is not

enough capacity available, you must first

delete one or more pictures or sounds.

Viewing screensaver/caller

pictures

v ¢ÉAdditional Features

¢Resource Directory ¢Screensavers /

Caller Pictures ¢(select entry)

§View§ Press the display key. The

selected picture is displayed.

Switch between pictures using

the q key.

Type Format

Sounds G.722 raw

Pictures

–CLIP picture

– Screensaver

BMP, JPG,

Non-animated GIF

190 x 144 pixels

240 x 320 pixels

each with a 24-bit colour

depth

Please note

The Gigaset QuickSync PC software con-

verts all the standard formats (MP3,

WMA, TIFF) into formats supported by

the base (see above) and adjusts the

image resolution to the resource direc-

tory.

123

Configuring the system settings

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / settings.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

If you have saved a picture in an invalid file

format, you will see an error message after

selecting the entry.

Playing back sounds

v ¢ÉAdditional Features

¢Resource Directory ¢Sounds

¢ (select entry)

The selected sound is played back immedi-

ately. Switch between the sounds using

the q key.

You can adjust the volume during playback:

¤Adjust the volume using the R / S

keys and pressing the display key §Save§.

Deleting/renaming a picture/

sound

You have selected an entry.

§Options§ Open menu.

You can select the following functions:

Delete Entry

The selected entry is deleted.

Rename

Change the name (max. 16 characters)

and press §Save§. The entry is stored with

the new name.

If a picture/sound cannot be deleted, these

options are not available.

If you delete a sound that is being used as

the ringer melody, the default melody will

be used instead.

If you delete a picture that is being used

as the caller picture or screensaver, the

Digital Clock will be displayed instead.

Checking the capacity

You can check how much capacity is availa-

ble for sounds and pictures.

v ¢ÉAdditional Features

¢Resource Directory ¢Capacity

Configuring the system

settings

You can make the following settings via the

menu on the base, on a registered

Gigaset SL78H, SL400H, S79H handset or via

the Web configurator on the base.

The following steps are carried out using the

base.

The majority of the settings can also be

made via a registered Gigaset SL78H,

SL400H or S79H handset. The procedure is

similar to that on the base, although the

menu structure is slightly different.

Instructions on operating via the base's Web

configurator can be found in the user guide

on the enclosed CD.

Setting the date and time

manually

To ensure you have the correct time for

incoming calls and to use the alarm clock

and calendar, the date and time must be set.

If the date and time on the base have not yet

been set, the §Time§ display key appears.

§Time§ Press the display key.

Or:

v ¢ÏSettings ¢Date/Time

Please note

The address of a time server on the Internet

is stored on your base. The date and time

are taken from this time server provided

that the base is connected to the Internet

and synchronisation with the time server is

activated. Manual settings are overwritten

in this case.

124

Configuring the system settings

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / settings.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

¤You can enter data in the following fields:

Date:

Enter day, month and year as an 8-digit

number via the keypad. e.g., QM

42Q for 07/14/2011.

Time:

Enter the hours and minutes in 4-digit

format via the keypad, e.g.,

QM5for 07:15 am.

¤If necessary, press the display key §am/pm§

to switch between am and pm.

¤Press the display key §Save§ to save

the settings.

Protecting against

unauthorised access

Protect the base system settings with a PIN

known only to you. You have to enter the

system PIN if you register or de-register a

handset, change local network settings, per-

form a firmware update or reset the phone

to default settings.

Changing the system PIN

You can change the base's 4-digit system PIN

(default setting: 0000) to a 4-digit PIN known

only by you.

Setting a system PIN facilitates remote oper-

ation of the answering machine

(¢page 95).

v ¢ÏSettings ¢System

¢System PIN

~If necessary, enter the current

system PIN for the base and

press §OK§.

~ Enter new system PIN.

§OK§ Press the display key.

Setting your own area code

To transfer phone numbers (e.g., in vCards),

it is essential that your area code (interna-

tional and local area code) is saved on the

base.

Some of these numbers are already preset.

v ¢ÏSettings ¢Telephony

¢Area Codes

Check that the (pre)set area code is correct.

¤You can enter data as follows:

qSelect/change input field.

rNavigate in the input field.

ÑIf necessary, delete number:

Press the display key.

~Enter number.

§Save§ Press the display key.

Example:

Please note

It is especially necessary to set the inter-

national code if you connect a GSM

mobile to the base via Bluetooth. Phone

numbers transferred from the GSM net-

work always include the international

access code, even for calls within a coun-

try.

If, for example, you later wish to call back

the caller from a call list via one of your

phone's connections, the international

code is withheld for national phone calls.

Area Codes

International code:

00 - 1

Local area code:

0 - [ ]

Info Save

125

Configuring the system settings

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / settings.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Setting the base's IP address

in LAN

Prerequisite: Your base is connected to a

router or a PC (¢page 16).

An IP address is required in order for the LAN

to "recognise" your base.

The IP address can be assigned to the base

automatically (by the router) or manually.

uIf done dynamically, the router's DHCP

server automatically assigns an IP

address to the base. The base's IP address

can be changed according to router set-

tings.

uIf done manually/statically, you assign a

static IP address to the base. This may be

necessary depending on your network

configuration (e.g., if your base is con-

nected directly to a PC).

You can also make local network settings via

the Web configurator.

v ¢ÏSettings ¢System

¢Local Network

~Enter the current system PIN if

necessary and press §OK§.

¤You can enter data in the following fields:

IP Address Type

Select Static or Dynamic.

For IP Address Type Dynamic:

The following fields show the current set-

tings that the phone obtained from the

router. These settings cannot be

changed.

For IP Address Type Static:

You must manually define the IP address

and the subnet mask for the base in the

following fields, as well as the standard

gateway and DNS server.

For IP Address Type Static:

IP Address

Enter the IP address that is to be assigned

to the base (overwriting the current set-

tings).

192.168.2.1 is the default setting.

For information on the IP address,

see the glossary on page 166.

Subnet Mask

Enter the subnet mask to be assigned to

the base (overwriting the current set-

tings).

The default setting is 255.255.255.0

For information on the subnet mask,

see the glossary on page 170.

DNS Server

Enter the IP address for the preferred DNS

server. The DNS server (Domain Name

System, ¢page 163) converts the sym-

bolic name of a server (DNS name) into

the public IP address for the server when

the connection is made.

You can specify your router's IP address

here. The router forwards base address

requests to its DNS server.

192.168.2.1 is the default setting.

Default Gateway

Enter the IP address for the standard

gateway (¢page 165) through which

the local network is connected to the

Internet. This is generally the local (pri-

vate) IP address for your router (e.g.,

192.168.2.1). Your base requires this infor-

mation to access the Internet.

192.168.2.1 is the default setting.

¤Press §Save§ to save the settings.

Please note

To assign the IP address dynamically, the

DHCP server on the router must be acti-

vated. Please also read the user guide for

your router.

Please note

You can also make the settings for the

local network via the Web configurator

(¢ operating instructions for the Web

configurator on the enclosed CD).

126

Configuring the system settings

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / settings.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Setting up/deleting

connections (MSNs)

Prerequisite: Your base is connected to the

network.

Your connection offers you two telephone

lines (B channels) that you can use simulta-

neously. You can set up a maximum of ten

separate phone numbers (MSNs) on your

base. You are assigned these phone num-

bers by your network provider.

If you have not yet stored all the numbers

with the installation wizard (¢page 20),

you can enter them now. You can start the

wizard at any time via the menu to change

the configuration.

All numbers that are stored retrospectively

are automatically assigned to the base, all

registered handsets and answering

machine 1 as receive MSNs.

Each new number you set up is automati-

cally given its own ringer, which you can

change individually (¢page 120).

You can set up, edit and delete MSNs with

the help of the wizard.

In idle status:

v ¢ÏSettings ¢Connection Wizard

¢ISDN

§Yes§ Press the display key to launch

the wizard.

§OK§ Press the display key to confirm

the info text.

A list of MSNs already set up is then dis-

played.

§Change§ Press the display key to set up

additional MSNs or modify the

settings for an existing MSN.

Setting up a new MSN

q Select the row MSN - Name of

an empty MSN entry.

~Enter MSN name (max. 16 char-

acters) (optional).

s Jump to the corresponding

MSN - Number line.

~Enter MSN number (max. 20 dig-

its; without area code = prefix).

¤Repeat this process for other MSNs, if

required.

¤Press the display key §Save§ to save the

changes.

Once the wizard is complete, the connection

wizard starts automatically. This enables you

to assign send and receive connections to

the base's internal parties (¢page 31).

Changing/deleting an MSN

q Select the MSN - Name / MSN -

Number for the MSN entry that

you wish to edit.

ÑDelete the previous name/

number.

~Enter the new MSN name/

number, if required.

¤Repeat this process for other MSNs, if

required.

¤Press the display key §Save§ to save the

changes.

If you have deleted both the MSN name and

number and not entered any new values, the

MSN is deleted.

Please note

There are several ways of assigning an

MSN to extension systems. For more

information on this topic, refer to the

user guide belonging to your extension

system.

Please note

If you do not set up any MSNs, all calls

will be made on the main number of

your connection. ISDN is shown for this

connection in the lists for selecting the

send and receive connections

(¢ e.g., page 128, page 93).

127

Configuring the system settings

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / settings.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

If the MSN you have deleted was the send

connection (page 104) of an internal party

then a new send connection (the MSN with

the lowest ranked number) will automati-

cally be assigned to this internal party.

Configuring VoIP

connections

You can configure up to six VoIP connections

on your telephone, i.e., you can assign up to

six VoIP phone numbers to your phone.

You need to set up an IP account (VoIP

account) with a VoIP provider for each con-

nection. You must save the access data for

this IP account on your phone. The IP wizard

will help you to do this.

Starting the IP wizard:

If your base is connected to the Internet and

, start the IP wizard as follows:

v ¢ÏSettings ¢Connection Wizard

¢VoIP

If your base is connected to the Internet and

analogue fixed line, start the IP wizard as fol-

lows:

v ¢ÏSettings ¢VoIP Wizard

In both cases you will see the following

question in the display:

The remaining procedure for the IP wizard is

described on page 24.

Each time you run the IP wizard you can

configure/reconfigure one VoIP connection

(IP account).

¤Restart the IP wizard if you wish to config-

ure/reconfigure another VoIP connec-

tion.

Automatic update for the VoIP

provider settings

After the first download of the VoIP provider

settings, your phone will check daily

whether a newer version of the file for your

VoIP provider is available from the Internet

on the configuration server. If there is an

update available, the message New profile

available. Update? is displayed in the idle

display of the base.

§Yes§ Press the display key to confirm

the prompt.

~Enter the system PIN if neces-

sary and press §OK§.

The new data for your VoIP provider will be

downloaded and saved on the phone.

If you answer the prompt with §No§, the

phone returns to idle status. Your telephone

will not remind you of this new profile again.

The message will only be shown again if a

newer version of the provider data is availa-

ble.

A profile update will only be started if no

other profile or firmware update is taking

place at the time.

IP Wizard

Start IP

installation wizard?

No Yes

128

Configuring the system settings

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / settings.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Assigning send and receive

connections to internal

parties

If you have several connections configured

for your telephone system, you can do the

following for each internal party:

uAssign a send connection or allow the

internal party to select the line for each

external call (select line).

uAssign one or several receive connec-

tions. Only calls received via one of the

assigned connections are signalled on

the device.

Assigning a send connection

Prerequisite: Several phone numbers are

configured for your base.

v ¢ÏSettings ¢Telephony

¢Send Connections

A list of the internal parties (base, handsets,

fax machine INT8 – where applicable) is dis-

played.

q Select the internal parties that

should be assigned a new send

connection and press the dis-

play key §OK§.

r Select Select at each call or an

connection as the send connec-

tion. All configured connections

are displayed with the names

you have set.

§Save§ Press the display key to save the

changes.

Select at each call is only offered if more

than one connection is configured on the

base.

If you select Select at each call, the internal

party can select which MSN is used to estab-

lish a connection every time he makes a call.

The Gigaset.net connection is not included

in the selection for the send connections.

Gigaset.net numbers (suffix #9) are automat-

ically dialled via Gigaset.net.

Assigning receive connections

Prerequisite: Several connections are con-

figured for your base.

v ¢ÏSettings ¢Telephony

¢Receive Connections

A list of the internal parties (base, handsets,

local answering machines, fax machine INT8

– where applicable) is displayed.

q Select the internal parties that

should be assigned new receive

connections and press the dis-

play key §OK§.

Please note

If the send connection for an internal

party is deleted or deactivated, then

depending on the connection, that party

is assigned either the fixed line connec-

tion or the first MSN in the configuration

as the send connection.

If the base is connected to the and no

MSN has been configured, the internal

party is assigned the main number for

the connection.

Making calls via Bluetooth GSM

connection

If you wish to make a call from the base via

the GSM connection of a mobile connected

to the phone via Bluetooth, you must select

either the GSM connection or Select at each

call as the send connection.

For the GSM connection, the name of the

mobile that is currently/was last connected

to the base is displayed in the list of known

devices. When selecting the send connec-

tion, the name of the currently connected

mobile is displayed.

The same applies if you wish to establish

GSM connections via a handset registered to

the base.

129

Configuring the system settings

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / settings.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

A list of all configured connections and the

Gigaset.net connection is opened. You can

select Yes or No for each connection.

r Select Yes if you want the rele-

vant connection to be the

receive connection for the inter-

nal party.Select No if it should

not be the receive connection.

s Change to the next connection.

¤Repeat these two steps for each connec-

tion.

¤Press the display key §Save§ to save the

changes.

Further information on how to assign

receive connections to local answering

machines can be found on page 89.

Updating the phone

firmware

Prerequisite: The base is connected to the

Internet (i.e., connected to a router,

¢page 16).

If necessary, you can update your base's

firmware.

The firmware update is downloaded directly

from the Internet by default. The relevant

Web page is preconfigured on your base.

Prerequisite:

The base is in idle status i.e.,

uNo calls are being made.

uThere is no internal connection to/

between the registered handsets.

uNo handset has the base menu open.

Starting the firmware update

manually

v ¢ÏSettings ¢System

Update Firmware

Select and press §OK§.

~Enter the system PIN and

press §OK§.

The base establishes a connection to the

Internet.

§Yes§ Press the display key to start the

firmware update.

Please note

uIf a new connection is configured, it is

assigned as the receive connection to

all internal parties and answering

machine 1.

uIf a connection is not assigned as the

receive connection to any internal

party, calls on this connection will not

be signalled.

Accepting calls to a Bluetooth GSM

connection

If you wish to accept calls on the base that

are made to the GSM connection of a mobile

connected to that base via Bluetooth, then

you must select the GSM connection as the

receive connection. The name of the mobile

is displayed for the GSM connection in the

list of known devices.

The same applies if you wish to accept calls

via the GSM connection to a handset regis-

tered on the base.

Please note

uThe firmware update can take up to

three minutes.

uWhen updating from the Internet,

checks are made to ensure that no

newer version of the firmware exists.

If this is not the case, the operation is

terminated and a message is issued to

that effect.

130

Configuring the system settings

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / settings.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Updating firmware automatically

Your base will check daily whether a newer

firmware version is available from the Inter-

net on the configuration server. If firmware

updates are available, the message New

firmware available. Update? is displayed in

the idle display of the base.

§Yes§ Press the display key to confirm

the prompt.

The firmware is loaded onto your base.

If you answer the prompt with §No§, the base

returns to idle status. Your base will no

longer remind you that firmware updates

are available. The message will only be

shown again if a newer version of the

firmware is available to download. You can

also carry out the firmware update manually

(¢page 129).

You can deactivate the automatic version

check via the Web configurator.

Activating/deactivating the

DECT interface

If you deactivate the DECT interface, the

radio connection between the base and the

registered handsets is terminated. Handsets

are "asynchronous" to the base. They cannot

establish a connection with the base and no

calls are signalled. Handsets do remain regis-

tered to the base and will synchronise with

the base as soon as you reactivate the DECT

interface.

v ¢ÏSettings ¢System

¢DECT Interface

§Change§ Press the display key to activate/

deactivate the DECT interface

(³= activated).

If there are no handsets registered to the

base, the base's DECT interface is automati-

cally deactivated.

If you switch the base to registration mode

(¢page 104) to reregister handsets, the

DECT interface is automatically reactivated.

Activating/deactivating the

FAX port

Prerequisite: Your base is connected to the .

You can connect a fax machine to the FAX

port on the telephone. To register the fax

machine to the base, you must activate the

FAX port.

The FAX port is deactivated by default.

When you activate the FAX port, it is

regarded as registered. The internal number

8 is assigned to it/the connected fax

machine. INT 8 is displayed in the list of

internal parties (even if there is not a fax

machine connected).

v ¢ÏSettings ¢System ¢FAX Port

§Change§ Press the display key to activate/

deactivate the FAX port

(³=on).

For instructions on connecting a fax

machine see page 114

Please note

If the base is not connected to the Inter-

net at the time when the check for new

firmware is to be carried out (e.g.,

because the router is deactivated), the

check is carried out as soon as the base is

reconnected to the Internet.

131

Configuring the system settings

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / settings.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Restoring the base to the

default settings

The individual settings are reset.

When the settings are restored:

uHandsets are still registered

uThe system PIN is not reset.

The following settings in particular are reset

to the default settings (you can make the

settings marked "*)" via the Web configura-

tor):

uThe entered MSNs and VoIP connections

(are deleted)

uThe assignment of send and receive con-

nections

uSettings for the ringer melodies and vol-

ume levels

uSettings for wake-up calls and appoint-

ments

uAudio settings for VoIP connections *)

uDTMF settings *)

uOwn area code

uSettings for the local network

uThe names of the handsets

uEco mode is deactivated

uPABX connection settings

uAnswering machine settings and per-

sonal announcements are deleted

uFunction and display key assignments as

well as key 

uSettings for network services: call divert,

call transfer (ECT)

The following lists are deleted:

uCall lists

uAnswering machine lists

v ¢Ï ¢System ¢Reset

~Enter the system PIN and

press §OK§.

§Yes§ Press the display key.

After resetting, the base is restarted.

The installation wizard is launched

(¢page 18).

Checking the base's MAC

address

Depending on your network configuration,

you may have to enter your base's MAC

address in your router's access control list,

for example. You can check the MAC address

on the base.

In idle status:

v Open menu.

*#Q5#2 Q

Press keys in sequence.

The MAC address is displayed.

§Back§ Return to idle status.

Changing the default

connection

You can connect your base to the Internet

(DSL connection) to make calls via VoIP and,

in addition, to a default telephone connec-

tion – the or analogue fixed line. Your tele-

phone automatically detects the network to

which it is connected and changes its config-

uration accordingly.

If you change the phone connection from to

the fixed line or vice versa, the following

message is displayed:

¤Press the display key §OK§ to start network

identification.

Please note

Connect the phone to the telephone

connection first and only afterwards to

the power supply.

Network Detection

Your physical line

has been changed.

132

Configuring the system settings

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / settings.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Once the network has been identified, the

following appears in the display:

Adapt system configuration to public

network?

Or:

Adapt system configuration to ISDN

network?

¤If the network has been identified cor-

rectly, press the display key §Yes§.

If you wish to repeat the network identifica-

tion procedure, press the display key §No§

instead.

Once you have confirmed the offered tele-

phone connection with §Yes§, any system set-

tings on the phone relating to the connec-

tion must be reset first so that the phone's

configuration can be adjusted to the

changed connection.

The following is displayed:

¤Press the display key §Yes§ to start the

reset.

All necessary system settings are reset.

IP and VoIP settings, for example, are

retained and the handsets are still regis-

tered.

If there were no VoIP connections config-

ured on the base before the change of con-

nection, after the reset the installation wiz-

ard is started for the current connection (see

the following table).

For the connection wizard procedure see

page 20ff.

Connection Wizards in the

following order

VoIP IP wizard

Registration wizard

Connection wizard

Network Detection

 Ð

All system settings

will be reset

to defaults.

No Yes

Fixed line and

VoIP

IP wizard

Registration wizard

Connection wizard

Please note

uIf you press the display key §Back§ or

press briefly on the red end key T,

you will go back to the previous dis-

play.

uTo cancel the entire procedure, press

and hold the red end key T.

None of the telephone settings will

then be changed in any way. You can

continue to use the telephone if you

reconnect it to the previous line type.

If, however, you still wish to operate

the telephone on the "new" line type,

you will need to reset it

(¢page 131). After this the wizards

will be started for the new line type.

Connection Wizards in the

following order

133

Connecting the base to a PABX

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / PABX.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Connecting the base to

a PABX

The following settings are only necessary if

your PABX requires them; see the PABX user

guide.

Saving an access code

(outside line code)

You can save two access codes: one for dial-

ling via or fixed line and one for dialling via

VoIP.

Prerequisite: You must enter an access code

for external calls using your PABX, e.g., "0".

v ¢Ï ¢Telephony ¢Access Code

¤You can enter data in the following fields:

Access external line with:

For dialling via or the analogue fixed line:

enter or change the access code, max.

three digits.

For:

Specify when the access code should be

inserted for dialling via or the fixed line:

Call Lists

The access code is put in front of numbers

dialled on the base or a handset from one

of the following lists:

– The accepted calls list

– In the missed calls list

– An answering machine list

All Calls

The access code prefixes all numbers

dialled on the base or a handset.

Off

The access code for fixed line is deacti-

vated. It does not prefix any phone

number.

Access external IP line with:

For dialling via VoIP connections: Enter or

change access code, max. 4 digits.

For:

Specify when the access code should also

be dialled when dialling via VoIP:

Call Lists

For dialling from the missed calls list,

accepted calls list or an answering

machine list.

All Calls

For all numbers dialled on the base or a

handset.

Off

No access code should be dialled first for

calls via a VoIP connection.

§Save§ Press the display key.

Please note

There are several ways of assigning an

MSN to extension systems. For more

information on this topic, please refer to

the user guide belonging to your exten-

sion system.

Please note

The access code never prefixes any emer-

gency numbers.

134

Connecting the base to a PABX

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / PABX.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Setting pauses (fixed line)

Changing the pause after line

seizure

You can change the length of the pause that

is inserted between picking up the receiver

c and sending the number.

v Open the main menu.

*#Q5#L

Press keys in sequence.

~Enter number for the length of

the pause (1= 1 sec.; 2=3secs;

3= 7 secs) and press §OK§.

Changing the pause after recall key

You can change the length of the pause if

your PABX requires this (refer to the user

guide for your PABX).

v Open the main menu.

*#Q5#2

Press keys in sequence.

~Enter a digit for the length of the

pause (1= 800 ms; 2=1600ms;

3= 3200 ms) and press §OK§.

Changing a dialling pause (pause

after access code)

v Open the main menu.

*#Q5#

Press keys in sequence.

~Enter a digit for the length of

the pause (1= 1 sec.; 2= 2 sec.;

3= 3 sec.; 4= 6 sec.) and

press §OK§.

Inserting a dialling pause:

¤Assign the function Insert P

(¢page 116) to one of the programma-

ble keys.

¤When entering the phone number, at the

point at which a dialling pause is to be

inserted, press and hold this function key

until a P appears in the display (approx.

2 seconds).

Setting recall (fixed line)

By default, your phone is set for operation on

the main connection (recall 250 ms). For

operation on a PABX, you may have to

change this value. Please refer to the user

guide for your PABX.

v ¢Ï ¢Telephony ¢Flash Duration

sSelect recall and press §Select§

(Ø= set value). Possibilities

include: 80 ms, 100 ms, 120 ms,

180 ms, 250 ms, 300 ms, 400 ms,

600 ms, 800 ms.

Transferring a call –

ECT (Explicit Call Transfer)

With some PABX systems, your two parties

are not connected when you replace

the receiver during call transfer (page 63).

In this case you need to activate this func-

tion (page 60). To do this, please refer to the

operating instructions of your PABX.

Using Centrex

If your base is part of a Centrex system, you

can use the following features:

Calling Name Identification (CNI)

When you receive incoming calls from other

Centrex subscribers, the caller's number and

name are shown on the display.

Message Waiting Indication (MWI)

New calls in the call list are indicated using

icons (¢page 68). The f message key

flashes.

135

Connecting the base to a PABX

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / PABX.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Selecting dialling mode/

options

The keypad function allows you to control

certain features by entering sequences of

characters and digits.

The keypad function must be activated

when you connect your base to an PABX or

exchange (e.g., Centrex) that is controlled

using keypad protocol. The digits/charac-

ters 0–9, * and # are sent as keypad informa-

tion elements. Please ask your service pro-

vider about the information and codes you

can transmit.

Setting options

You can switch between the Auto. Tone Dial,

Auto. Keypad and Dial of * and # settings.

Auto. Tone Dial

Once normal dialling has been activated,

* and # are not transmitted during dial-

ling and if * and # are entered it is not pos-

sible to switch to the keypad.

Auto. Keypad

Once * or # have been entered, this set-

ting automatically switches signalling

during dialling to the keypad. This auto-

matic switchover is needed for giving

commands to the exchange or PABX.

Dial of * and #

Once Dial of * and # has been activated,

the * and # characters are transmitted

during dialling as commands to the

exchange or PABX.

Regardless of the setting options above,

after dialling or during a call the phone

switches automatically to tone dialling

(DTMF), e.g., for remote control of an

answering machine.

v ¢ÏSettings ¢Telephony

¢Dialing Mode

qSelect setting and press §Select§

e.g., Auto. Tone Dial (Ø=on).

Activating/deactivating the

keypad during a call

In addition to the permanent settings

described above, you can also switch tem-

porarily to Auto. Keypad.

The setting only applies to the current exter-

nal call and is automatically deactivated

after the call is ended.

Depending on whether Auto. Keypad is acti-

vated, you may need to activate or deacti-

vate Auto. Keypad during the call.

§Options§ Open menu.

Auto. Keypad

Select and press §Change§

(³=on).

136

Industry Canada Certification

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / appendix.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Industry Canada Certification

Operation is subject to the following two condi-

tions (1) this device may not cause interference,

and (2) this device must accept any interference,

including interference that may cause undesired

operation of the device.

NOTICE: The Industry Canada label identifies certi-

fied equipment. This certification means that the

equipment meets certain telecommunications

network, protective, operational and safety

requirements as prescribed in the appropriate Ter-

minal Equipment Technical Requirements docu-

ment(s). The Department does not guarantee the

equipment will operate to the user’s satisfaction.

Before installing this equipment, users should

ensure that it is permissible to be connected to

the facilities of the local telecommunications

company. The equipment must also be installed

using an acceptable method of connection. The

customer should be aware that compliance with

the above conditions may not prevent

degradation of service in some situations.

Repairs to certified equipment should be coordi-

nated by a representative designated by the sup-

plier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user

to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions,

may give the telecommunications company cause

to request the user to disconnect the equipment.

Users should ensure for their own protection that

the electrical ground connections of the power

utility, telephone lines and internal metallic water

pipe system, if present, are connected together.

This precaution may be particularly important in

rural areas

NOTE: Users should not attempt to make such

connections themselves, but should contact the

appropriate electric inspection authority,

or electrician, as appropriate.

This product meets the applicable Industry

Canada technical specifications.

The Ringer Equivalence Number is an indication of

the maximum number of devices allowed to be

connected to a telephone interface. The termina-

tion of an interface may consist of any combina-

tion of devices subject only to the requirement

that the sum of the RENs of all devices does not

exceed five.

This Class B digital apparatus complies with Cana-

dian ICES-003.

Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est con-

forme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.

FCC / ACTA Information

Warning: Changes or modifications to this unit

not expressly approved by Gigaset Communica-

tions USA LLC could void the FCC authority to

operate the equipment. This includes the addition

of any external antenna device.

This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC

rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA.

On the bottom of the base station is a label that

contains, among other information, a product

identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If

requested, this number must be provided to the

telephone company.

A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to

the premises wiring and telephone network must

comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and

requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant

telephone cord and modular plug is provided

with this product. It is designed to be connected

to a compatible modular jack that is also compli-

ant. See installation instructions for details.

The REN is used to determine the number of

devices that may be connected to a telephone

line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result

in the devices not ringing in response to an

incoming call. In most but not all areas, the sum of

RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of

the number of devices that may be connected to

a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact

the local telephone company. For products

approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this prod-

uct is part of the product identifier that has the

format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits repre-

sented by ## are the REN without a decimal point

(e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the

REN is separately shown on the label.

A copy of the supplier's Declaration of Conformity

(SDoC) is available at this Internet address:

www.gigaset.com/docs.

If this equipment causes harm to the telephone

network, the telephone company will notify you

advance, that temporary discontinuance of serv-

ice may be required. But if advance notice isn’t

practical, the telephone company will notify the

customer as soon as possible. Also, you will be

advised of your right to file a complaint with the

FCC if you believe it is necessary.

The telephone company may make changes in its

facilities, equipment, operations or procedures

that could affect the operation of the equipment.

If this happens the telephone company will pro-

vide advance notice in order for you to make nec-

essary modifications to maintain uninterrupted

137

FCC / ACTA Information

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / appendix.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

service. If you experience trouble with this tele-

phone system, disconnect it from the network

until the problem has been corrected or until you

are sure that the equipment is not malfunction-

ing.

If trouble is experienced with this equipment, for

repair or warranty information, please contact

Support at 1-866 247-8758. If the equipment is

causing harm to the telephone network, the tele-

phone company may request that you disconnect

the equipment until the problem is resolved. This

equipment is of a type that is not intended to be

repaired by the Customer (user).

This telephone system may not be used on coin

service provided by the telephone company. Con-

nection to party line service is subject to state tar-

iffs. Contact the state public utility commission,

public service commission or corporation com-

mission for information. Privacy of communica-

tions may not be ensured when using this phone.

If your home has specially wired alarm equipment

connected to the telephone line, ensure the

installation of this equipment does not disable

your alarm equipment. If you have questions

about what will disable alarm equipment, consult

your telephone company or a qualified installer.

This telephone system equipment has been

tested and found to comply with the limits for

Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following

two conditions: (1) This device may not cause

harmful interference, and (2) This device must

accept any interference received, including inter-

ference that may cause undesired operation.

These limits are designed to provide reasonable

protection against harmful interference in a resi-

dential installation. Some cordless telephones

operate at frequencies that may cause interfer-

ence to nearby TV’s and VCR’s; to minimize or pre-

vent such interference, the system base should

not be placed near or on top of a TV or VCR; and, if

interference is experienced, moving the base far-

ther away from the TV or VCR will often reduce or

eliminate the interference.

However, there is no guarantee that interference

will not occur in a particular installation. If this tel-

ephone system does cause harmful interference

to radio or television reception, which can be

determined by turning the system off and on, the

user is encouraged to try to correct the interfer-

ence by one or more of the following measures:

1. Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

2. Increase the separation between the base sta-

tion and receiver.

3. Connect the base station into an outlet on a cir-

cuit different from that to which the receiver is

connected.

4. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV

technician for help.

Notice for Direct Inward Dialing

("DID")

ALLOWING THIS EQUIPMENT TO BE OPERATED IN

SUCH A MANNER AS TO NOT PROVIDE FOR

PROPER ANSWER SUPERVISION IS A VIOLATION

OF PART 68 OF THE FCC‘S RULES.

Notice to Hearing Aid Wearers:

This phone system is compatible with inductively

coupled hearing aids.

Power Outage:

In the event of a power outage, your cordless

telephone will not operate. The cordless tele-

phone requires electricity for operation. You

should have a telephone that does not require

electricity available for use during power outages.

Notice:

The installation of the base unit should allow

at least 8 inches between the base and persons to

be in compliance with FCC RF exposure guide-

lines.

For body worn operation, the portable part (hand-

set) has been tested and meets FCC RF exposure

guidelines. Use with an accessory that contains

metal parts may not ensure compliance with FCC

RF exposure guidelines.

Notice to telephone company service:

If you need service from your telephone company,

please provide them with the information

– Facility interface Code (FIC)

– Service Order Code (SOC)

– Universal Service Order Code (USOC)

as indicated on the label on the bottom side of the

base station.

Safety precautions

Before using your telephone equipment, basic

safety instructions should always be followed to

reduce the risk of fire, electric shock and injury to

persons.

1. Read and understand all instructions.

2. Follow all warnings and instructions marked on

the product.

3. Unplug this product from the wall telephone

jack and power outlet before cleaning. Do not use

liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Use damp

cloth for cleaning.

138

FCC / ACTA Information

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / appendix.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

4. Do not use this product near water, for example,

near a bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or laun-

dry tub, in a wet basement or near a swimming

pool.

5. Place this product securely on a stable surface.

Serious damage and/or injury may result if the

unit falls.

6. Slots or openings in the cabinet and the back

and bottom are provided for ventilation, to pro-

tect it from overheating. These openings must not

be blocked or covered. This product should never

be placed near or over a radiator or heat register,

or in a place where proper ventilation is not pro-

vided.

7. This product should be operated only from the

type of power source indicated on the marking

label. If you are not sure of the type of AC line

power to your home, consult your dealer or local

power company.

8. Do not place objects on the power cord. Install

the unit where no one can step or trip on the cord.

9. Do not overload wall outlets and extension

cords as this can result in the risk of fire or electric

shock.

10. Never push objects of any kind into this prod-

uct through cabinet slots as they may touch dan-

gerous voltage points or short out parts that could

result in the risk of fire or electric shock. Never spill

liquid of any kind on this product.

11. To reduce the risk of electric shock or burns, do

not disassemble this product. Take it to a qualified

service center when service is required. Opening

or removing covers may expose you to dangerous

voltages, dangerous electrical current or other

risks. Incorrect reassembly can cause electric

shock when the appliance is subsequently used.

Disconnect TNV circuit connector before remov-

ing cover.

12. Unplug the product from the wall outlet and

refer servicing to qualified service personnel

under the following conditions:

a.) When the power cord is damaged or frayed.

b.) If liquid has been spilled into the product.

c.) If the product has been exposed to rain or

water.

d.) If the product does not operate normally by fol-

low

ing the operating instructions. Adjust only

those controls

that are covered by the operating

instructions because improper adjustment of

other controls may result in damage and may

require extensive work by a qualified technician to

restore the product to normal operation.

e.) If the product has been dropped or physically

has been damaged.

f.) If the product exhibits a distinct change in per-

formance.

13. Avoid using a telephone (other than a cordless

type) during a thunderstorm. There may be a

remote risk of electrical shock from lightning.

Therefore we suggest a surge arrestor.

14. Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak

in the vicinity of the leak.

15. Emergency/911 numbers may not be dialed if

the keypad is locked.

16. Minimum No. 26 AWG telecommunication line

cord must be used with this phone.

BATTERY SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

To reduce the risk of fire, injury or electric shock,

and to properly dispose of batteries, please read

and understand the following instructions.

CONTAINS NICKEL METAL HYDRIDE BATTERY. BAT-

TERY MUST BE RECYCLED OR DISPOSED OF PROP-

ERLY. DO NOT DISPOSE OF IN MUNICIPAL WASTE.

1. Only use the batteries specified for use with this

product.

2. DO NOT USE NICKEL CADMIUM OR LITHIUM

BATTERIES, or mix batteries of different sizes or

from different manufacturers in this product. DO

NOT USE NONRECHARGEABLE BATTERIES.

3. Do not dispose of the batteries in a fire; the cells

may explode. Do not expose batteries to water.

Check with local codes for special disposal instruc-

tions.

4. Do not open or mutilate the batteries. Released

electrolyte is corrosive and may cause damage to

the eyes or skin. The electrolyte may be toxic if

swallowed.

5. Exercise care in handling the batteries in order

not to short the batteries with conducting materi-

als such as rings, bracelets, and keys. The batteries

or conducting material may overheat and cause

burns or fire.

6. Charge the batteries provided with, or identi-

fied for use with, this product only in accordance

with the instructions and limitations specified in

the user’s manual. Do not attempt to charge the

batteries with any means other than that specified

in the users manual.

7. Periodically clean the charge contacts on both

the charger and handset.

139

Service (Customer Care)

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / appendix.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Service (Customer Care)

Customer Care Warranty for Cordless Products

To obtain Customer Care Warranty service,

product operation information, or for problem resolution, call:

Toll Free: 1-866 247-8758

End-user limited warranty

This product is covered by a one year limited war-

ranty. Any repair replacement or warranty service,

and all questions about this product should be

directed to: 1-866 247-8758.

This limited, non-transferable warranty is pro-

vided to the original buyer/end-consumer ("you")

for systems, handsets and accessories (collec-

tively, "Product") provided by Gigaset Communi-

cations USA LLC or Gigaset Communications Can-

ada Inc. (collectively "Gigaset NAM"). Gigaset NAM

warrants to you that at the date of purchase, the

Product is free of defects in workmanship and

materials and the software included in the Prod-

uct will perform in substantial compliance to its

program specifications.

1. WARRANTY PERIOD

The Product warranty period is one (1) year from

the original date of purchase by you. Proof of pur-

chase (e.g., sales slip or invoice) must be provided

with any Product returned during the warranty

period. Batteries supplied with the Products are

warranted to be free from defects at the time of

purchase only.

2. EXCLUSIVE REMEDY

Gigaset NAM's entire liability and your exclusive

remedy if the Product is defective in materials or

workmanship during the warranty period and is

returned shall be that the Product will be repaired

or replaced as set forth in Section 4 below. Recon-

ditioned replacement components, parts or mate-

rials may be used in the replacement or repair.

Data in the memory of the Product may be lost

during repair.

3. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY DOES NOT

COVER AND IS VOID WITH RESPECT

TO THE FOLLOWING:

– Cosmetic damage, physical damage to the sur-

face of the Product, including, without limita-

tion, breakage, cracks, dents, scratches or

adhesive marks on the LCD screen or outside

casing of the Product.

– Products which have been repaired, main-

tained or modified (including the antenna) by

anyone other than Gigaset NAM or a Gigaset

NAM-approved repair facility, or that have

been improperly installed.

– Cost of installation, removal or reinstallation.

– Damage due to any telephone, electronic,

hardware or software program, network, Inter-

net or computer malfunctions, failures, or diffi-

culties of any kind, including without limita-

tion, server failure or incomplete, incorrect,

garbled or delayed computer transmissions.

– Equipment and components not manufac-

tured, supplied or authorized by Gigaset NAM.

– Modification of the Product's components, or

operation of the Product in an unsuitable envi-

ronment or in a manner for which it is not

intended, including but not limited to failures

or defects caused by misuse, abuse, accidents,

physical damage, abnormal operation,

improper handling or storage, neglect, altera-

tions, unauthorized installation, removal or

repairs, failure to follow instructions, problems

caused by the carrier's network coverage,

exposure to fire, water or excessive moisture or

dampness, floods, or extreme changes in cli-

mate or temperature, acts of God, riots, acts of

terrorism, spills of food or liquids, viruses or

other software flaws introduced into the Prod-

uct or other acts which are not the fault of

Gigaset NAM and which the Product is not

specified to tolerate, including damage caused

by mishandling or blown fuses.

– Products which have had warranty stickers,

electronic serial number and/or serial number

label removed, altered, rendered illegible or

fraudulently applied to other equipment.

– Signal reception problems (unless caused by

defect in material or workmanship in the Prod-

uct).

– Products operated outside published maxi-

mum ratings.

– Performance of the Products when used in

combination with other products or equip-

ment not manufactured, supplied or author-

ized by Gigaset NAM.

– Consumables (such as batteries and fuses).

140

Service (Customer Care)

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / appendix.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

– Payments for labor or service to representa-

tives or service centers not authorized to per-

form product maintenance by Gigaset NAM.

– Loss of data.

– Testing and examination discloses that the

alleged defect or malfunction in the Product

does not exist.

This warranty does not cover customer education,

instruction, installation or removal, set up adjust-

ments, problems related to service(s) provided by

a carrier or other service provider, and/or signal

reception problems. Gigaset NAM shall not be

responsible for software, firmware, information, or

memory data contained in, stored on, or inte-

grated with any Products returned for repair,

whether under warranty or not. This warranty is

valid only in the country in which it is purchased

(i.e., the United States of America or Canada

respectively, but not both).

USE WITH ACCESSORIES NOT SUPPLIED BY

GIGASET NAM OR NOT OTHERWISE EXPRESSLY

AUTHORIZED BY GIGASET NAM MAY VOID

WARRANTY.

4. WARRANTY CLAIM PROCEDURE

All warranty claims must be made by notifying

Gigaset NAM prior to the expiration of the war-

ranty period. Gigaset NAM's obligation to provide

warranty support shall not extend past the end of

the warranty period, except that any product

repaired or replaced during the warranty period

shall continue to be warranted for the balance of

such warranty period or thirty (30) days, which-

ever is greater.

Support service will be provided for you by

accessing the toll free customer service number:

1-866 247-8758

5. LIMITATION OF WARRANTY

Gigaset NAM makes no warranty or representa-

tion that the software in the Products will meet

your requirements or will work in combination

with any hardware or applications software prod-

ucts provided by third parties, that the operation

of the software will be uninterrupted or error free,

or that all defects in the software products will be

corrected.

6. LIMITATION ON REMEDIES; NO

CONSEQUENTIAL OR OTHER

DAMAGES

Your exclusive remedy for any breach of this lim-

ited warranty is as set forth above. Except for any

refund elected by Gigaset NAM, YOU ARE NOT

ENTITLED TO ANY DAMAGES, INCLUDING BUT

NOT LIMITED TO CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES,

if the Product does not meet the limited warranty

, and, to the maximum extent allowed by applica-

ble law, even if any remedy fails of its essential

purpose. The terms below ("Exclusion of Inciden-

tal, Consequential and Certain Other Damages")

are also incorporated into this limited warranty .

Some states/jurisdictions/provinces do not allow

the exclusion or limitation of incidental or conse-

quential damages, so the above limitation or

exclusion may not apply to you. This limited war-

ranty gives you specific legal rights. You may have

others which vary from state/jurisdiction/prov-

ince to state/jurisdiction/province.

7. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES

GIGASET NAM AND ITS SUPPLIERS PROVIDE THE

PRODUCT AND SUPPORT SERVICES (IF ANY) AS IS

AND WITH ALL FAULTS. THE LIMITED WARRANTY

IS IN LIEU OF ANY OTHER EXPRESS WARRANTIES

(IF ANY) CREATED BY ANY DOCUMENTATION OR

PACKAGING EXCEPT FOR THE LIMITED WAR-

RANTY, AND TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMIT-

TED BY APPLICABLE LAW IS IN LIEU OF ANY

IMPLIED OR STATUTORY WARRANTIES, INCLUD-

ING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRAN-

TIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OF ACCURACY OR COM-

PLETENESS OR RESPONSES, OF RESULTS, OF

WORKMANLIKE EFFORT, OF LACK OF VIRUSES

AND OF LACK OF NEGLIGENCE, ALL WITH REGARD

TO THE PRODUCT, AND THE PROVISION OF OR

FAILURE TO PROVIDE SUPPORT SERVICES. ALSO,

THERE IS NO WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF TITLE,

QUIET ENJOYMENT, QUIET POSSESSION, OR COR-

RESPONDENCE TO DESCRIPTION OR NONIN-

FRINGEMENT WITH REGARD TO THE PRODUCT.

Some states/jurisdictions/provinces do not allow

limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts

or the exclusion or limitation of incidental or con-

sequential damages, so the above exclusions or

limitations may not apply to you. If an implied

warranty or condition is created by your state/

province and federal or state/provincial law pro-

hibits disclaimer of it, you also have an implied

warranty or condition, BUT ONLY AS TO DEFECTS

DISCOVERED DURING THE PERIOD OF THIS LIM-

ITED WARRANTY (ONE YEAR). AS TO ANY DEFECTS

DISCOVERED AFTER THE ONE YEAR PERIOD,

THERE IS NO WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF ANY

KIND. This limited warranty gives you specific legal

rights, and you may also have other rights which

vary from state to state/province to province. In

no event shall Gigaset NAM's liability exceed the

cost of repairing or replacing defective Products

as provided herein, and any such liabilities will ter-

minate upon expiration of the warranty period.

141

Service (Customer Care)

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / appendix.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Any supplements or updates to the Product or the

software in the Product, including without limita-

tion, any (if any) software fixes or upgrades or bug

fixes provided to you after the expiration of the

one year limited warranty period are not covered

by any warranty or condition, express, implied or

statutory.

8. EXCLUSION OF INCIDENTAL,

CONSEQUENTIAL AND CERTAIN

OTHER DAMAGES

TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLI-

CABLE LAW, IN NO EVENT SHALL GIGASET NAM,

SELLER OR THEIR SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY

SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUEN-

TIAL DAMAGES WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING, BUT

NOT LIMITED TO, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF PROFITS

OR CONFIDENTIAL OR OTHER INFORMATION, FOR

BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, FOR PERSONAL INJURY,

FOR LOSS OF PRIVACY, FOR FAILURE TO MEET ANY

DUTY INCLUDING OF GOOD FAITH OR OF REA-

SONABLE CARE, FOR NEGLIGENCE, AND FOR ANY

OTHER PECUNIARY OR OTHER LOSS WHATSO-

EVER) ARISING OUT OF OR IN ANY WAY RELATED

TO THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROD-

UCT, THE PROVISION OF OR FAILURE TO PROVIDE

SUPPORT SERVICES, OR OTHERWISE UNDER OR IN

CONNECTION WITH ANY PROVISION OF THIS LIM-

ITED WARRANTY, EVEN IN THE EVENT OF THE

FAULT, TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), STRICT

LIABILITY, BREACH OF CONTRACT OR BREACH OF

WARRANTY OF GIGASET NAM OR SELLER OR ANY

SUPPLIER, AND EVEN IF GIGASET NAM OR SELLER

OR ANY SUPPLIER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE

POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. REPAIR OR

REPLACEMENT, AS PROVIDED UNDER THE WAR-

RANTY, IS YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY

FOR BREACH OF THE LIMITED WARRANTY.

9. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY AND

REMEDIES

NOTWITHSTANDING ANY DAMAGES THAT YOU

MIGHT INCUR FOR ANY REASON WHATSOEVER

(INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ALL DAM-

AGES REFERENCED ABOVE AND ALL DIRECT OR

GENERAL DAMAGES), THE ENTIRE LIABILITY OF

GIGASET NAM, SELLER AND ANY OF THEIR SUPPLI-

ERS UNDER ANY PROVISION OF THIS LIMITED

WARRANTY AND YOUR EXCLUSIVE REMEDY FOR

ALL OF THE FOREGOING (EXCEPT FOR ANY REM-

EDY OF REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT ELECTED BY

GIGASET NAM OR SELLER OR SUPPLIER WITH

RESPECT TO ANY BREACH OF THE LIMITED WAR-

RANTY) SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE GREATER OF

THE AMOUNT ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FOR THE

PRODUCT OR FIVE DOLLARS ($5.00 USD/CAN).

THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS, EXCLUSIONS AND

DISCLAIMERS SHALL APPLY TO THE MAXIMUM

EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, EVEN IF

ANY REMEDY FAILS ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE.

10. GOVERNING LAW

If this Product was purchased in the United States

of America this limited warranty will be governed

by the laws of Texas, and exclude the United

Nations Convention on Contracts for the Interna-

tional Sale of Goods. If this Product was purchased

in Canada this limited warranty will be governed

by the laws of the Province of Ontario and the fed-

eral laws of Canada applicable therein, and

exclude the United Nations Convention on Con-

tracts for the International Sale of Goods.

If you want to learn more about Gigaset Service or

for Support on your Gigaset phone, visit our web

site at http://www.gigaset.com or please call

1-866 247-8758.

Issued by

Gigaset Communications GmbH

Frankenstr. 2a, D-46395 Bocholt

Subject to availability. Rights of modifications

reserved.

Product attributes subject to change.

We reserve the right, to make changes without

notice in equipment design and/or components.

Part Number: A31008-XXXXX-XXXX-X-XXXX

142

Service (Customer Care)

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / appendix.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Questions and answers

If you have any questions about the use of

your base, visit our website at

www.gigaset.com/service

for assistance 24/7. The table below contains

a list of common problems and possible

solutions.

Registration or connection problems with a

Bluetooth headset.

¥Reset the Bluetooth headset (see the user

guide for your headset).

¥Delete registration data from the base by

deregistering the device (¢page 110).

¥Repeat the registration process

(¢page 109).

The display is blank.

1. The base is not connected to the mains power

supply.

¥Check the mains connection

(¢page 15).

2. The backlight is deactivated because a time

control was activated (¢page 119).

¥Press any key on the base to temporarily

activate the display backlight.

Or:

¥Deactivate the time control

(¢page 119).

No connection between the base and handset.

1. Handset is out of the range of the base.

¥Move the handset closer to the base.

2. Range of the base has been reduced as

Eco mode is active.

¥Deactivate Eco Mode (¢page 100) or

reduce the distance between the handset

and the base.

3. The handset has not been registered to the

base or was deregistered due to the registra-

tion of an additional handset (more than

six DECT registrations).

¥Register the handset with the base

(¢page 104).

4. The firmware is currently being updated.

¥Please wait until the update is complete.

5. Base is not switched on.

¥Check the power adapter for the base

(¢page 14).

The base does not ring.

1. The ringer is switched off.

¥Activate the ringer (¢page 121).

2. Call divert set for "All Calls".

¥Deactivate call divert (¢page 58).

3. The connection on which the call is received is

not assigned to the base as a receive connec-

tion.

¥Change the assignment of receive connec-

tions (¢page 104).

The display shows "Please check phone connec-

tion".

Connector to the telephone network may not be

plugged in.

¥Check the telephone connection

(¢page 14).

You cannot hear a ringer/dialling tone from the

fixed line.

The supplied phone cable is not being used or

the phone cable may be faulty.

¥Replace the phone cable. When purchasing

from a phone retailer, ensure the cable has

the correct jack pin connections

(¢page 149).

Phone does not ring after setting up the phone

number (MSN).

The area code has been stored with the MSN.

£Save MSN without area code.

Some of the network services do not work as

specified.

Features are not activated.

£Query with the network provider.

Error tone sounds after system PIN prompt.

You have entered the wrong system PIN.

¥Repeat input of system PIN.

The other party cannot hear you.

You have pressed the mute button P.

The base is "muted".

¥Unmute the microphone (¢page 57).

The number of the caller is not displayed

despite CLIP/CLI being activated.

Calling Line Identification is not enabled.

¥The caller should ask the network provider to

enable Calling Line Identification.

143

Service (Customer Care)

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / appendix.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

You hear an error tone when keying in informa-

tion (a descending tone sequence).

Action has failed/invalid input.

¥Repeat the process.

Watch the display and refer to the user guide

if necessary.

No time is specified for a message in the call list.

Date and time have not been set.

¥Set date/time or

¥Activate synchronisation with a time server

on the Internet via the Web configurator.

An answering machine announces "PIN is incor-

rect" during remote operation.

You have entered the wrong system PIN.

¥Repeat input of system PIN.

An answering machine is not recording any

messages/has switched over to announce only.

Its memory is full.

¥Delete old messages.

¥Play back new messages and delete.

An answering machine will not record a call or

ends the recording.

1. An error tone sounds and the display shows

Not possible.

¥You are making the call via a broadband

connection. A recording is not possible in

this case. The attempt by the base to

establish a non-broadband connection

instead has failed.

2. The display shows AM memory full - Delete

messages.

The answering machine's memory is full.

¥Delete messages and then start recording

again.

Or:

¥End the call, delete old messages on the

answering machine and then re-establish

the connection.

Firmware update or VoIP profile download is

not carried out.

1. If Currently not possible is displayed, the VoIP

connections may be busy or a download/

update is already being carried out.

¥Repeat the process at a later date.

2. If File unreadable is displayed, the firmware

file may be invalid.

¥Use only the firmware available on the

preconfigured Gigaset configuration

server.

3. If Server not accessible is displayed, the

download server may not be accessible.

¥The server is currently not accessible.

Repeat the process at a later date.

¥You have changed the preconfigured

server address. Correct the address. Reset

the base, if necessary.

4. If Transmission error XXX is displayed, an

error has occurred during the transmission of

the file. An HTTP error code is displayed for

XXX.

¥Repeat the process. If the error occurs

again, consult the Service department.

5. If Check IP settings. is displayed, your base

may not be connected to the Internet.

¥Check the cable connections between the

base and router and between the router

and the Internet.

¥Check whether the base is connected to

the LAN i.e., it can be reached at its IP

address.

You cannot establish a connection to the base

with your PC's Web browser.

¥When establishing a connection, check the

base's local IP address that has been entered.

You can check the IP address on your base

(page 125).

¥Check the connections between the PC and

the base. Transmit a ping command to your

base e.g., from your PC (ping <base's local IP

address>).

¥You have tried to reach the base via a secure

http (https://...). Try again with http://....

144

Service (Customer Care)

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / appendix.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

VoIP status codes

In the following tables you will find the

meaning of the most important VoIP status

codes and messages.

Exclusion of liability

Some displays may contain pixels (pic-

ture elements), which remain activated

or deactivated. As a pixel is made up of

three sub-pixels (red, green, blue), it is

possible that pixel colours may vary.

This is completely normal and does not

indicate a fault.

Status

code

Meaning

0x31 IP configuration error

IP domain not entered.

0x33 IP configuration error:

SIP user name ( Authentication Name)

not entered.

This is shown, for example, when dialling

with a line suffix, if no connection is con-

figured for the suffix on the base.

0x34 IP configuration error:

SIP password (Authentication Pass-

word) not entered.

0x300 The called party can be reached under

multiple phone numbers. If the VoIP pro-

vider supports this, a list of the phone

numbers is transmitted as well as the

status code. The caller can select the

number to which he wants to make the

connection.

0x301 Permanently diverted.

The called party can no longer be

reached under this number. The new

number is transferred to the phone

together with the status code, and the

phone then no longer accesses the old

number but dials the new address

immediately.

0x302 Temporarily diverted.

The phone is informed that the called

party cannot be reached under the

dialled number. The call is diverted for a

limited period. The phone is also noti-

fied of the length of the diversion.

0x305 The query is sent to a different "proxy

server", e.g., to balance incoming que-

ries. The phone will make the same

query once again to another proxy

server. This is not a redirection of the

address per se.

0x380 Other service:

The query or call could not be trans-

ferred. However, the phone is notified

of other options available to connect

the call.

145

Service (Customer Care)

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / appendix.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

0x400 Wrong call

0x401 Not authorised

0x403 The requested service is not supported

by the VoIP provider.

0x404 Wrong phone number.

No connection on this number.

Example: While making a local call you

have not dialled the area code although

your VoIP provider does not support

local calls.

0x405 Method not permitted.

0x406 Not acceptable.

The requested service cannot be pro-

vided.

0x407 Proxy authentication required.

0x408 The party cannot be reached

(e.g., account has been deleted).

0x410 The requested service is not available

from the VoIP provider.

0x413 Message is too long.

0x414 URI is too long.

0x415 Query format is not supported.

0x416 URI is faulty.

0x420 Incorrect ending

0x421 Incorrect ending

0x423 The requested service is not supported

by the VoIP provider.

0x480 The dialled number is temporarily una-

vailable.

0x481 The recipient is not available.

0x482 Double service query

0x483 Too many "jumps":

The query was rejected because the

service server (proxy) has decided that

this query has already passed through

too many service servers. The maximum

number is defined beforehand by the

original sender of the query.

0x484 Wrong number:

In most cases this response means that

you have simply omitted one or more

digits in the phone number.

Status

code

Meaning

0x485 The URI dialled is not unique and cannot

be processed by the VoIP provider.

0x486 The called party is busy.

0x487 General faults:

The call was cancelled before a call was

established. The status code confirms

receipt of the interruption signal.

0x488 The server cannot process the query

because the data entered in the media

description is not compatible.

0x491 The server notifies that the query will be

processed as soon as a previous query

has been completed.

0x493 The server rejects the query because the

phone cannot decrypt the message.

The sender has used an encryption

method that either the server or the

receiver phone cannot decrypt.

0x500 The proxy or the receiving device has

discovered a fault while executing the

query. It is therefore impossible to exe-

cute the query. If this occurs, the caller or

the phone displays the fault and repeats

the query after a few seconds.

The number of seconds after which

the query can be repeated may be

transmitted to the caller or phone by the

receiving device.

0x501 The query cannot be processed by the

recipient because the recipient does not

have the functionality that the caller

requires. If the recipient understands the

query but does not process it because

the sender does not have the necessary

rights or the query is not permitted in

the current context, status code 405 is

transmitted instead of 501.

0x502 In this case, the receiving device that

transmits this error code is a proxy or a

gateway and has received an invalid

response from its gateway via which this

query is to be processed.

0x503 The query cannot be processed by the

receiving device or the proxy at present

because the server is either overloaded

or is being serviced. If it is possible for

the query to be repeated in the

foreseeable future, the server informs

the caller or the phone of this.

Status

code

Meaning

146

Service (Customer Care)

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / appendix.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Checking service information

If you contact Customer Services, you may

need the base's service information.

Prerequisite:

uThe send connection is fixed line:

You must pick up the receiver when in

idle mode or be conducting an external

call.

uThe send connection is VoIP:

You are conducting an external call.

§Options§ ¢Service Info

Confirm selection with §OK§.

You can select the following information/

functions with q:

1: Base serial number (RFPI)

2: Not in use: - - -

3: Informs the service employees

of the base settings (in hex dia-

gram format) e.g., the number

of registered handsets. The last

three digits indicate the line

types available on the base.

4: Variant (digits 1 to 4),

Telephone firmware version

(digits 5 to 6).

5: Gigaset.net number of your

phone. A service employee can

use this number to call you over

the Internet without you need-

ing to be registered with a VoIP

provider. This means that the

employee can test online con-

nections and VoIP telephony

regardless of the VoIP provider.

6: Device number of the base. This

contains additional information

for the service employee.

0x504 Time limit exceeded at the gateway.

0x505 The server rejects the query because the

indicated version number of the SIP pro-

tocol does not concur with at least the

version that is used by the server or SIP

device involved in this query.

0x515 The server rejects the query because the

message exceeds the maximum permit-

ted size.

0x600 The called party is busy.

0x603 The called party has rejected the call.

0x604 The called URI does not exist.

0x606 The communication settings are not

acceptable.

0x701 The called party has hung up.

0x703 Connection cancelled because of time-

out.

0x704 Connection interrupted because of a

SIP error.

0x705 Wrong dialling tone

0x706 No connection established

0x751 Busy tone:

No codec match between the calling

and called party.

0x810 General socket layer error: User is not

authorised.

0x811 General socket layer error:

Wrong socket number

0x812 General socket layer error: Socket is not

connected.

0x813 General socket layer error:

Memory error

0x814 General socket layer error: Socket not

available – check IP settings/connection

problem/VoIP setting incorrect.

0x815 General socket layer error:

Illegal application on the socket inter-

face.

Status

code

Meaning

Please note

You may need to wait a few seconds before

§Options§ appears on the display

147

Environment

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / appendix.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Unlock System

(only if the device has been locked by the pro-

vider)

Confirm selection with §OK§.

If necessary you can unlock a

provider-specific device lock

with a corresponding code.

Update Profile

Confirm selection with §OK§.

Your current VoIP provider pro-

files (general provider data for

all configured VoIP connec-

tions) are automatically loaded

onto your phone. The general

settings for all VoIP connections

for which profiles are available

on the Internet are updated.

Send configuration

Select this option only if you are

requested to do so by the Serv-

ice employee.

Environment

Our environmental mission

statement

We, Gigaset Communications GmbH, bear

social responsibility and are actively com-

mitted to a better world. Our ideas, technol-

ogies and actions serve people, society and

the environment. The aim of our global

activity is to secure sustainable life resources

for humanity. We are committed to a respon-

sibility for our products that comprises their

entire life cycle. The environmental impact

of products, including their manufacture,

procurement, distribution, utilisation, serv-

ice and disposal, are already evaluated dur-

ing product and process design.

Further information on environmentally

friendly products and processes is available

on the Internet at www.gigaset.com.

Environmental management

system

Gigaset Communications

GmbH is certified pursuant

to the international stand-

ards EN 14001 and

ISO 9001.

ISO 14001 (Environment): Certified since

September 2007 by TüV SÜD Management

Service GmbH.

ISO 9001 (Quality): Certified since 17/02/

1994 by TüV Süd Management Service

GmbH.

148

Appendix

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / appendix.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Ecological energy consumption

The use of ECO DECT (¢page 100) saves

energy and makes an active contribution

towards protecting the environment.

Disposal

All electrical and electronic products should

be disposed of separately from the munici-

pal waste stream via designated collection

facilities appointed by the government or

the local authorities.

This crossed-out wheeled

bin symbol on the product

means the product is

covered by the European

Directive 2002/96/EC.

The correct disposal and

separate collection of your old appliance will

help prevent potential negative conse-

quences for the environment and human

health. It is a precondition for reuse and

recycling of used electrical and electronic

equipment.

For more detailed information about dis-

posal of your old appliance, please contact

your local council refuse centre or the origi-

nal supplier of the product.

Appendix

Caring for your telephone

Wipe the base station, charging cradle and

handset with a damp cloth (do not use sol-

vent) or an antistatic cloth.

Never use a dry cloth. This can cause static.

Contact with liquid

If the handset has come into contact with

liquid:

1. Switch off the handset and remove the

battery pack immediately.

2. Allow the liquid to drain from the hand-

set.

3. Pat all parts dry, then place the handset

with the battery compartment open and

the keypad facing down in a dry, warm

place for at least 72 hours (not in a mic-

rowave, oven etc.).

4. Do not switch on the handset again un-

til it is completely dry.

When it has fully dried out, you will normally

be able to use it again.

Insert strips

Blank insert strips for the function keys can

be found on the enclosed CD.

Specifications

Power consumption of the base

In idle status Approx. 3.6 W

During a call Approx. 4.3 W

149

Appendix

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / appendix.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

General specifications

Pin connections on the fixed line

telephone jack

Writing and editing text

The following rules apply when writing text:

uEach key between Q and O is

assigned several letters and characters.

uControl the cursor with uvts.

Press and hold u or v to move the cur-

sor word by word.

uCharacters are inserted to the left of the

cursor.

uPress the star key * to display the table

of special characters. Select the required

character and press the display key §Insert§

to insert the character at the cursor posi-

tion.

uPress and hold Q to O to enter digits.

uPress display key Ñ to delete the char-

acter to the left of the cursor. Press and

hold to delete the word to the left of the

cursor.

uThe first letter of the name of directory

entries is automatically capitalised, fol-

lowed by lower case letters.

Setting upper/lower case or digits

Repeatedly press the hash key # to

change the text input mode.

The active mode is indicated at the bottom

right of the screen.

Interfaces analogue fixed line, Ether-

net, Bluetooth

DECT standard Supported

GAP standard Supported

No. of channels 30 duplex channels

Radio frequency

range

1920–1930 MHz

Duplex method Time multiplex,

10 ms frame length

Channel grid 1728 kHz

Bit rate 1152 kbit/s

Modulation GFSK

Language code 32 kbit/s

Transmission power 5 mW, average power per

channel

Range (handsets) up to 984 feet outdoors,

up to 165 feet indoors

Power supply 120 V ~/60 Hz

Environmental con-

ditions for operation

+41°F to +113°F, 20% to

75% relative humidity

Dialling mode DTMF (tone dialling)

Codec G.711, G.726, G.729AB with

VAD/CNG, G.722

Quality of Service TOS, DiffServ

Protocols DECT, GAP, SIP, RTP, DHCP,

NAT Traversal (STUN), HTTP

2unused

3unused

4unused

5unused

6unused

7unused

123 Writing digits

Abc Upper case (first letter in capitals,

all others in lower case)

abc Lower case

150

Appendix

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / appendix.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Writing names

Press the relevant key several times to enter

letters/characters.

¤Enter the individual letters/characters by

pressing the corresponding key.

The characters assigned to the key are

shown in a selection line at the bottom left

of the screen. The selected character is high-

lighted.

¤Briefly press the key several times in suc-

cession to select the required letter/char-

acter.

If you press and hold the key, the corre-

sponding digit is inserted.

Standard characters

1) Space

2) Line break

Using Gigaset QuickSync –

additional functions via the

PC interface

You can connect your base to your computer

via Bluetooth (page 108) or via the Ethernet

cable supplied. To use the Bluetooth con-

nection, your PC must be equipped with a

suitable dongle and Bluetooth must be acti-

vated on the base.

You can access base functions and data from

your PC via AT commands.

The "Gigaset QuickSync" program (found

on the enclosed CD) provides you with a

convenient interface for communicating

with the base.

¤Install this program on your PC.

Here are some of the functions that will then

be available to you:

uReading service information, e.g.,

firmware version, serial number, manu-

facturer, MAC address of the base.

uSynchronising the directory on your base

with your PC's Outlook contacts.

uTransferring images as screensavers/

caller pictures from the PC to the resource

directory on the base.

uDownloading sounds (ringer melodies)

from the PC to the base.

You can also use AT commands to:

uMake outgoing calls and accept incom-

ing calls. The display on the base behaves

as if the call was being handled directly

on it.

1x 2x 3x 4x 5x 6x 7x 8x 9x 10x

1

2abc2äáàâãç

3def3ëéèê

4gh i4ïíìî

5jkl5

Lmno6öñóòôõ

Mpqr s 7ß

Ntuv8üúùû

Owx y z9 ÿýæøå

Q.,?! 0

Please note

It is not possible to have two parallel con-

nections active between the PC and base

via Bluetooth and LAN.

151

Appendix

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / appendix.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Data transfer

During the transfer of data between the

base and PC, the message Data transfer in

progress is shown on the display.

Any incoming calls are ignored during this

time. You can use the red end key T to

cancel the data transfer. You cannot enter

anything else via the keypad while data

transfer is in progress.

Using Open Source software

contained in the product

The firmware for your Gigaset phone

includes integrated Open Source licensed

software from third-party providers. These

integrated Open Source software files are

protected by copyright. Rights of use for this

Open Source software that extend beyond

the pure scope of the program execution

intended by Gigaset Communications

GmbH are stipulated in the license condi-

tions for the Open Source software.

If these rights of use are observed, then the

Open Source software can be used as the

license intended. Conflicts may arise

between the license conditions of Gigaset

Communications GmbH and the Open

Source software license conditions. In such

cases, the Open Source software license con-

ditions have priority for the relevant Open

Source parts of the software. You will find

the licence text in its original English version

on the pages that follow. The license condi-

tions are also available at the following web-

site: http://www.gigaset.com/opensource/

If the programs contained in this product are

licensed as part of the GNU General Public

License (GPL), GNU Lesser General Public

License (LGPL) or another Open Source soft-

ware license that requires the disclosure of

the source code, and the product does not

contain software in source code format, then

the source code and copyright information

relating to this software can be downloaded

from the following Internet site:

http://www.gigaset.com/opensource/

The corresponding source code can be

requested from Gigaset Communications

GmbH, but this will incur a EUR 10 process-

ing charge for the provision. This request can

be made within three years from the date of

purchase. Please enclose a receipt with the

date of purchase, the ID number (MAC ID) for

the product and the version number for the

device firmware installed and send to the

following address:

Warranty for other uses of the Open

Source software

Gigaset Communications GmbH does not

provide any warranty for Open Source soft-

ware contained in this product, should it be

used for purposes other than those

intended by Gigaset Communications

GmbH for the execution of the program. The

licenses listed below define the warranty

insofar as intended by the authors and licen-

sors for the Open Source software. Gigaset

Communications GmbH shall not accept lia-

bility for damage occurring through

changes to an Open Source software pro-

gram or product configuration. Further-

more, Gigaset Communications GmbH shall

not accept liability in the event of copyright

infringement by third parties relating to the

Open Source software.

Technical support will only be provided, if

necessary, for the software in its unchanged

original condition.

Open Source Software included in the

delivery

This product contains software developed

by the University of California, Berkeley, and

its associates.

Small Parts Dispatch Com Bocholt

E-mail: kleinteileversand.com@gigaset.com

Fax: 0049 2871/91 30 29

152

Appendix

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / appendix.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

GNU General Public License

(GPL)

Version 2, June 1991

tion, Inc.

59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-

1307 USA

Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute ver-

batim copies of this license document, but chang-

ing it is not allowed.

Preamble

The licenses for most software are designed to

take away your freedom to share and change it. By

contrast, the GNU General Public License is

intended to guarantee your freedom to share and

change free software – to make sure the software

is free for all its users. This General Public License

applies to most of the Free Software Foundation's

software and to any other program whose authors

commit to using it. (Some other Free Software

Foundation software is covered by the GNU Lesser

General Public License instead.) You can apply it to

your programs, too.

When we speak of free software, we are referring

to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses

are designed to make sure that you have the free-

dom to distribute copies of free software (and

charge for this service if you wish), that you

receive source code or can get it if you want it, that

you can change the software or use pieces of it in

new free programs; and that you know you can do

these things.

To protect your rights, we need to make restric-

tions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights

or to ask you to surrender the rights. These restric-

tions translate into certain responsibilities for you

if you distribute copies of the software, or if you

modify it.

For example, if you distribute copies of such a pro-

gram, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give

the recipients all the rights that you have. You

must make sure that they, too, receive or can get

the source code. And you must show them these

terms so they know their rights.

We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copy-

right the software, and (2) offer you this license

which gives you legal permission to copy, distrib-

ute and/or modify the software.

Also, for each author's protection and ours, we

want to make certain that everyone understands

that there is no warranty for this free software. If

the software is modified by someone else and

passed on, we want its recipients to know that

what they have is not the original, so that any

problems introduced by others will not reflect on

the original authors' reputations.

Finally, any free program is threatened constantly

by software patents. We wish to avoid the danger

that redistributors of a free program will individu-

ally obtain patent licenses, in effect making the

program proprietary. To prevent this, we have

made it clear that any patent must be licensed for

everyone's free use or not licensed at all. The pre-

cise terms and conditions for copying, distribution

and modification follow.

GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE

TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR

COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND

MODIFICATION

0. This License applies to any program or other

work which contains a notice placed by the copy-

right holder saying it may be distributed under

the terms of this General Public License. The "Pro-

gram", below, refers to any such program or work,

and a "work based on the Program" means either

the Program or any derivative work under copy-

right law: that is to say, a work containing the Pro-

gram or a portion of it, either verbatim or with

modifications and/or translated into another lan-

guage. (Hereinafter, translation is included with-

out limitation in the term "modification".) Each

licensee is addressed as "you".

Activities other than copying, distribution and

modification are not covered by this License; they

are outside its scope. The act of running the Pro-

gram is not restricted, and the output from the

Program is covered only if its contents constitute a

work based on the Program (independent of hav-

ing been made by running the Program). Whether

that is true depends on what the Program does.

1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of

the Program's source code as you receive it, in any

medium, provided that you conspicuously and

appropriately publish on each copy an appropri-

ate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty;

keep intact all the notices that refer to this License

and to the absence of any warranty; and give any

other recipients of the Program a copy of this

License along with the Program.

153

Appendix

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / appendix.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

You may charge a fee for the physical act of trans-

ferring a copy, and you may, at your discretion,

offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.

2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Pro-

gram or any portion of it, thus forming a work

based on the Program, and copy and distribute

such modifications or work under the terms of

Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of

these conditions:

a) You must cause the modified files to carry

prominent notices stating that you changed

the files and the date of any change.

b) You must cause any work that you distribute

or publish, that in whole or in part contains or

is derived from the Program or any part

thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge

to all third parties under the terms of this

License.

c) If the modified program normally reads

commands interactively when run, you must

cause it, when running is commenced for such

interactive use in the most ordinary way, to

print or display an announcement including

an appropriate copyright notice and a notice

that there is no warranty (or else, saying that

you provide a warranty) and that users may

redistribute the program under these condi-

tions, and telling the user how to view a copy

of this License. (Exception: if the Program itself

is interactive but does not normally print such

an announcement, your work based on the

Program is not required to print an announce-

ment.)

These requirements apply to the modified work as

a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are

not derived from the Program, and can be reason-

ably considered independent and separate works

in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do

not apply to those sections when you distribute

them as separate works. But when you distribute

the same sections as part of a whole which is a

work based on the Program, the distribution of

the whole must be on the terms of this License,

whose permissions for other licensees extend to

the entire whole, and thus to each and every part

regardless of who wrote it. Thus, it is not the intent

of this section to claim rights or contest your

rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the

intent is to exercise the right to control the distri-

bution of derivative or collective works based on

the Program.

In addition, mere aggregation of another work not

based on the Program with the Program (or with a

work based on the Program) on a volume of a stor-

age or distribution medium does not bring the

other work under the scope of this License.

3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a

work based on it, under Section 2) in object code

or executable form under the terms of Sections 1

and 2 above, provided that you also do one of the

following:

a) Accompany it with the complete corre-

sponding machine-readable source code,

which must be distributed under the terms of

Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium custom-

arily used for software interchange; or,

b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for

at least three years, to give any third party, for

a charge no more than your cost of physically

performing source distribution, a complete

machine-readable copy of the corresponding

source code, to be distributed under the terms

of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium cus-

tomarily used for software interchange; or,

c) Accompany it with the information you

received as to the offer to distribute corre-

sponding source code. (This alternative is

allowed only for noncommercial distribution

and only if you received the program in object

code or executable form with such an offer, in

accord with Subsection b above.)

The source code for a work means the preferred

form of the work for making modifications to it.

For an executable work, complete source code

means all the source code for all modules it con-

tains, plus any associated interface definition files,

plus the scripts used to control compilation and

installation of the executable. However, as a spe-

cial exception, the source code distributed need

not include anything that is normally distributed

(in either source or binary form) with the major

components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the

operating system on which the executable runs,

unless that component itself accompanies the

executable.

If distribution of executable or object code is

made by offering access to copy from a desig-

nated place, then offering equivalent access to

copy the source code from the same place counts

as distribution of the source code, even though

third parties are not compelled to copy the source

along with the object code.

154

Appendix

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / appendix.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distrib-

ute the Program except as expressly provided

under this License. Any attempt otherwise to

copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program

is void, and will automatically terminate your

rights under this License. However, parties who

have received copies, or rights, from you under

this License will not have their licenses terminated

so long as such parties remain in full compliance.

5. You are not required to accept this License,

since you have not signed it. However, nothing

else grants you permission to modify or distribute

the Program or its derivative works. These actions

are prohibited by law if you do not accept this

License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing

the Program (or any work based on the Program),

you indicate your acceptance of this License to do

so, and all its terms and conditions for copying,

distributing or modifying the Program or works

based on it.

6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any

work based on the Program), the recipient auto-

matically receives a license from the original licen-

sor to copy, distribute or modify the Program sub-

ject to these terms and conditions. You may not

impose any further restrictions on the recipients'

exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not

responsible for enforcing compliance by third par-

ties to this License.

7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or alle-

gation of patent infringement or for any other rea-

son (not limited to patent issues), conditions are

imposed on you (whether by court order, agree-

ment or otherwise) that contradict the conditions

of this License, they do not excuse you from the

conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute

so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations

under this License and any other pertinent obliga-

tions, then as a consequence you may not distrib-

ute the Program at all. For example, if a patent

license would not permit royalty-free redistribu-

tion of the Program by all those who receive cop-

ies directly or indirectly through you, then the

only way you could satisfy both it and this License

would be to refrain entirely from distribution of

the Program.

If any portion of this section is held invalid or

unenforceable under any particular circumstance,

the balance of the section is intended to apply

and the section as a whole is intended to apply in

other circumstances.

It is not the purpose of this section to induce you

to infringe any patents or other property right

claims or to contest validity of any such claims;

this section has the sole purpose of protecting the

integrity of the free software distribution system,

which is implemented by public license practices.

Many people have made generous contributions

to the wide range of software distributed through

that system in reliance on consistent application

of that system; it is up to the author/donor to

decide if he or she is willing to distribute software

through any other system and a licensee cannot

impose that choice.

This section is intended to make thoroughly clear

what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of

this License.

8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is

restricted in certain countries either by patents or

by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright

holder who places the Program under this License

may add an explicit geographical distribution lim-

itation excluding those countries, so that distribu-

tion is permitted only in or among countries not

thus excluded. In such a case, this License incorpo-

rates the limitation as if written in the body of this

License.

9. The Free Software Foundation may publish

revised and/or new versions of the General Public

License from time to time. Such new versions will

be similar in spirit to the present version, but may

differ in detail to address new problems or con-

cerns.

Each version is given a distinguishing version

number. If the Program specifies a version number

of this License which applies to it and "any later

version", you have the option of following the

terms and conditions either of that version or of

any later version published by the Free Software

Foundation. If the Program does not specify a ver-

sion number of this License, you may choose any

version ever published by the Free Software Foun-

dation.

10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program

into other free programs whose distribution con-

ditions are different, write to the author to ask for

permission. For software which is copyrighted by

the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free

Software Foundation; we sometimes make excep-

tions for this. Our decision will be guided by the

two goals of preserving the free status of all deriv-

atives of our free software and of promoting the

sharing and reuse of software generally.

155

Appendix

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / appendix.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

NO WARRANTY

11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF

CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PRO-

GRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICA-

BLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN

WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR

OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS"

WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER

EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT

LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MER-

CHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR

PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY

AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH

YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE,

YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERV-

ICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.

12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICA-

BLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY

MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PRO-

GRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU

FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPE-

CIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES

ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE

THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO

LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INAC-

CURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD

PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO

OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF

SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN

ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS

How to Apply These Terms to Your

New Programs

If you develop a new program, and you want it to

be of the greatest possible use to the public, the

best way to achieve this is to make it free software

which everyone can redistribute and change

under these terms.

To do so, attach the following notices to the pro-

gram. It is safest to attach them to the start of each

source file to most effectively convey the exclu-

sion of warranty; and each file should have at least

the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full

notice is found.

You should have received a copy of the GNU Gen-

eral Public License along with this program; if not,

write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59

Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307

USA

Also add information on how to contact you by

electronic and paper mail.

If the program is interactive, make it output a

short notice like this when it starts in an interac-

tive mode:

The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show

c' should show the appropriate parts of the Gen-

eral Public License. Of course, the commands you

use may be called something other than `show w'

and `show c'; they could even be mouse-clicks or

menu items – whatever suits your program.

You should also get your employer (if you work as

a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a

"copyright disclaimer" for the program, if neces-

sary.

Here is a sample; alter the names:

<one line to give the program's name and a

brief idea of what it does.>

This program is free software; you can redistrib-

ute it and/or modify it under the terms of the

GNU General Public License as published by the

Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of

the License, or (at your option) any later version.

This program is distributed in the hope that it

will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY;

without even the implied warranty of MER-

CHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR

PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License

for more details.

Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) <year>

Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO

WARRANTY; for details type `show w'. This is

free software, and you are welcome to redistrib-

ute it under certain conditions; type `show c' for

details.

Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright

interest in the program `Gnomovision' (which

makes passes at compilers) written by James

Hacker.

<signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1989, Ty Coon,

President of Vice

156

Appendix

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / appendix.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

This General Public License does not permit incor-

porating your program into proprietary programs.

If your program is a subroutine library, you may

consider it more useful to permit linking proprie-

tary applications with the library. If this is what

you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General Public

License instead of this License.

GNU Lesser General Public

License (LGPL)

Version 2.1, February 1999

tion, Inc.

59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-

1307 USA

Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute ver-

batim copies of this license document, but chang-

ing it is not allowed.

[This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL.

It also counts as the successor of the GNU Library

Public License, version 2, hence the version

number 2.1.]

Preamble

The licenses for most software are designed to

take away your freedom to share and change it. By

contrast, the GNU General Public Licenses are

intended to guarantee your freedom to share and

change free software--to make sure the software

is free for all its users.

This license, the Lesser General Public License,

applies to some specially designated software

packages – typically libraries – of the Free Soft-

ware Foundation and other authors who decide to

use it. You can use it too, but we suggest you first

think carefully about whether this license or the

ordinary General Public License is the better strat-

egy to use in any particular case, based on the

explanations below.

When we speak of free software, we are referring

to freedom of use, not price. Our General Public

Licenses are designed to make sure that you have

the freedom to distribute copies of free software

(and charge for this service if you wish); that you

receive source code or can get it if you want it; that

you can change the software and use pieces of it

in new free programs; and that you are informed

that you can do these things.

To protect your rights, we need to make restric-

tions that forbid distributors to deny you these

rights or to ask you to surrender these rights.

These restrictions translate into certain responsi-

bilities for you if you distribute copies of the

library or if you modify it.

For example, if you distribute copies of the library,

whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the

recipients all the rights that we gave you. You

must make sure that they, too, receive or can get

the source code. If you link other code with the

library, you must provide complete object files to

the recipients, so that they can relink them with

the library after making changes to the library and

recompiling it. And you must show them these

terms so they know their rights.

We protect your rights with a two-step method:

(1) we copyright the library, and (2) we offer you

this license, which gives you legal permission to

copy, distribute and/or modify the library.

To protect each distributor, we want to make it

very clear that there is no warranty for the free

library. Also, if the library is modified by someone

else and passed on, the recipients should know

that what they have is not the original version, so

that the original author's reputation will not be

affected by problems that might be introduced by

others.

Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to

the existence of any free program. We wish to

make sure that a company cannot effectively

restrict the users of a free program by obtaining a

restrictive license from a patent holder. Therefore,

we insist that any patent license obtained for a

version of the library must be consistent with the

full freedom of use specified in this license.

Most GNU software, including some libraries, is

covered by the ordinary GNU General Public

License. This license, the GNU Lesser General Pub-

lic License, applies to certain designated libraries,

and is quite different from the ordinary General

Public License. We use this license for certain

libraries in order to permit linking those libraries

into non-free programs.

When a program is linked with a library, whether

statically or using a shared library, the combina-

tion of the two is legally speaking a combined

work, a derivative of the original library. The ordi-

nary General Public License therefore permits

such linking only if the entire combination fits its

criteria of freedom. The Lesser General Public

License permits more lax criteria for linking other

code with the library.

We call this license the "Lesser" General Public

License because it does Less to protect the user's

freedom than the ordinary General Public License.

It also provides other free software developers

Less of an advantage over competing non-free

programs. These disadvantages are the reason we

use the ordinary General Public License for many

libraries. However, the Lesser license provides

advantages in certain special circumstances.

157

Appendix

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / appendix.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

For example, on rare occasions, there may be a

special need to encourage the widest possible use

of a certain library, so that it becomes a de-facto

standard. To achieve this, non-free programs must

be allowed to use the library. A more frequent

case is that a free library does the same job as

widely used non-free libraries. In this case, there is

little to gain by limiting the free library to free soft-

ware only, so we use the Lesser General Public

License.

In other cases, permission to use a particular

library in non-free programs enables a greater

number of people to use a large body of free soft-

ware. For example, permission to use the GNU C

Library in non-free programs enables many more

people to use the whole GNU operating system, as

well as its variant, the GNU/Linux operating sys-

tem.

Although the Lesser General Public License is Less

protective of the users' freedom, it does ensure

that the user of a program that is linked with the

Library has the freedom and the wherewithal to

run that program using a modified version of the

Library.

The precise terms and conditions for copying, dis-

tribution and modification follow. Pay close atten-

tion to the difference between a "work based on

the library" and a "work that uses the library". The

former contains code derived from the library,

whereas the latter must be combined with the

library in order to run.

GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC

LICENSE

TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR

COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND

MODIFICATION

0. This License Agreement applies to any software

library or other program which contains a notice

placed by the copyright holder or other author-

ized party saying it may be distributed under the

terms of this Lesser General Public License (also

called "this License"). Each licensee is addressed as

"you".

A "library" means a collection of software func-

tions and/or data prepared so as to be conven-

iently linked with application programs (which

use some of those functions and data) to form

executables.

The "Library", below, refers to any such software

library or work which has been distributed under

these terms. A "work based on the Library" means

either the Library or any derivative work under

Library or a portion of it, either verbatim or with

modifications and/or translated straightforwardly

into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is

included without limitation in the term "modifica-

tion".)

"Source code" for a work means the preferred

form of the work for making modifications to it.

For a library, complete source code means all the

source code for all modules it contains, plus any

associated interface definition files, plus the

scripts used to control compilation and installa-

tion of the library.

Activities other than copying, distribution and

modification are not covered by this License; they

are outside its scope. The act of running a pro-

gram using the Library is not restricted, and out-

put from such a program is covered only if its con-

tents constitute a work based on the Library (inde-

pendent of the use of the Library in a tool for writ-

ing it). Whether that is true depends on what the

Library does and what the program that uses the

Library does.

1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of

the Library's complete source code as you receive

it, in any medium, provided that you conspicu-

ously and appropriately publish on each copy an

appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of

warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to

this License and to the absence of any warranty;

and distribute a copy of this License along with

the Library.

158

Appendix

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / appendix.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

You may charge a fee for the physical act of trans-

ferring a copy, and you may at your option offer

warranty protection in exchange for a fee.

2. You may modify your copy or copies of the

Library or any portion of it, thus forming a work

based on the Library, and copy and distribute such

modifications or work under the terms of Section

1 above, provided that you also meet all of these

conditions:

a) The modified work must itself be a software

library.

b) You must cause the files modified to carry

prominent notices stating that you changed

the files and the date of any change.

c) You must cause the whole of the work to be

licensed at no charge to all third parties under

the terms of this License.

d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a

function or a table of data to be supplied by an

application program that uses the facility,

other than as an argument passed when the

facility is invoked, then you must make a good

faith effort to ensure that, in the event an

application does not supply such function or

table, the facility still operates, and performs

whatever part of its purpose remains mean-

ingful.

(For example, a function in a library to com-

pute square roots has a purpose that is entirely

well-defined independent of the application.

Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that any

application-supplied function or table used by

this function must be optional: if the applica-

tion does not supply it, the square root func-

tion must still compute square roots.)

These requirements apply to the modified work as

a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are

not derived from the Library, and can be reasona-

bly considered independent and separate works

in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do

not apply to those sections when you distribute

them as separate works. But when you distribute

the same sections as part of a whole which is a

work based on the Library, the distribution of the

whole must be on the terms of this License, whose

permissions for other licensees extend to the

entire whole, and thus to each and every part

regardless of who wrote it.

Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim

rights or contest your rights to work written

entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the

right to control the distribution of derivative or

collective works based on the Library.

In addition, mere aggregation of another work not

based on the Library with the Library (or with a

work based on the Library) on a volume of a stor-

age or distribution medium does not bring the

other work under the scope of this License.

3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary

GNU General Public License instead of this License

to a given copy of the Library. To do this, you must

alter all the notices that refer to this License, so

that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public

License, version 2, instead of to this License. (If a

newer version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU

General Public License has appeared, then you

can specify that version instead if you wish.) Do

not make any other change in these notices.

Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irre-

versible for that copy, so the ordinary GNU Gen-

eral Public License applies to all subsequent cop-

ies and derivative works made from that copy. This

option is useful when you wish to copy part of the

code of the Library into a program that is not a

library.

4. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a

portion or derivative of it, under Section 2) in

object code or executable form under the terms of

Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accom-

pany it with the complete corresponding

machine-readable source code, which must be

distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2

above on a medium customarily used for software

interchange.

If distribution of object code is made by offering

access to copy from a designated place, then

offering equivalent access to copy the source

code from the same place satisfies the require-

ment to distribute the source code, even though

third parties are not compelled to copy the source

along with the object code.

5. A program that contains no derivative of any

portion of the Library, but is designed to work

with the Library by being compiled or linked with

it, is called a "work that uses the Library". Such a

work, in isolation, is not a derivative work of the

Library, and therefore falls outside the scope of

this License.

However, linking a "work that uses the Library"

with the Library creates an executable that is a

derivative of the Library (because it contains por-

tions of the Library), rather than a "work that uses

the library". The executable is therefore covered by

this License. Section 6 states terms for distribution

of such executables.

159

Appendix

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / appendix.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

When a "work that uses the Library" uses material

from a header file that is part of the Library, the

object code for the work may be a derivative work

of the Library even though the source code is not.

Whether this is true is especially significant if the

work can be linked without the Library, or if the

work is itself a library. The threshold for this to be

true is not precisely defined by law.

If such an object file uses only numerical parame-

ters, data structure layouts and accessors, and

small macros and small inline functions (ten lines

or less in length), then the use of the object file is

unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally a

derivative work. (Executables containing this

object code plus portions of the Library will still

fall under Section 6.)

Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library,

you may distribute the object code for the work

under the terms of Section 6. Any executables

containing that work also fall under Section 6,

whether or not they are linked directly with the

Library itself.

6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may

also combine or link a "work that uses the Library"

with the Library to produce a work containing

portions of the Library, and distribute that work

under terms of your choice, provided that the

terms permit modification of the work for the cus-

tomer's own use and reverse engineering for

debugging such modifications.

You must give prominent notice with each copy of

the work that the Library is used in it and that the

Library and its use are covered by this License. You

must supply a copy of this License. If the work dur-

ing execution displays copyright notices, you

must include the copyright notice for the Library

among them, as well as a reference directing the

user to the copy of this License. Also, you must do

one of these things:

a) Accompany the work with the complete cor-

responding machine-readable source code for

the Library including whatever changes were

used in the work (which must be distributed

under Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the work

is an executable linked with the Library, with

the complete machine-readable "work that

uses the Library", as object code and/or source

code, so that the user can modify the Library

and then relink to produce a modified execut-

able containing the modified Library.

(It is understood that the user who changes

the contents of definitions files in the Library

will not necessarily be able to recompile the

application to use the modified definitions.)

b) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for

linking with the Library. A suitable mechanism

is one that (1) uses at run time a copy of the

library already present on the user's computer

system, rather than copying library functions

into the executable, and (2) will operate prop-

erly with a modified version of the library, if the

user installs one, as long as the modified ver-

sion is interface-compatible with the version

that the work was made with.

c) Accompany the work with a written offer,

valid for at least three years, to give the same

user the materials specified in Subsection 6a,

above, for a charge no more than the cost of

performing this distribution.

d) If distribution of the work is made by offer-

ing access to copy from a designated place,

offer equivalent access to copy the above

specified materials from the same place.

e) Verify that the user has already received a

copy of these materials or that you have

already sent this user a copy.

For an executable, the required form of the "work

that uses the Library" must include any data and

utility programs needed for reproducing the exe-

cutable from it. However, as a special exception,

the materials to be distributed need not include

anything that is normally distributed (in either

source or binary form) with the major compo-

nents (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operat-

ing system on which the executable runs, unless

that component itself accompanies the executa-

ble.

It may happen that this requirement contradicts

the license restrictions of other proprietary librar-

ies that do not normally accompany the operating

system. Such a contradiction means you cannot

use both them and the Library together in an exe-

cutable that you distribute.

7. You may place library facilities that are a work

based on the Library side-by-side in a single

library together with other library facilities not

covered by this License, and distribute such a

combined library, provided that the separate dis-

tribution of the work based on the Library and of

the other library facilities is otherwise permitted,

and provided that you do these two things:

a) Accompany the combined library with a

copy of the same work based on the Library,

uncombined with any other library facilities.

This must be distributed under the terms of

the Sections above.

b) Give prominent notice with the combined

library of the fact that part of it is a work based

on the Library, and explain where to find the

accompanying uncombined form of the same

work.

160

Appendix

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / appendix.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with,

or distribute the Library except as expressly pro-

vided under this License. Any attempt otherwise

to copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute

the Library is void, and will automatically termi-

nate your rights under this License. However, par-

ties who have received copies, or rights, from you

under this License will not have their licenses ter-

minated so long as such parties remain in full

compliance.

9. You are not required to accept this License,

since you have not signed it. However, nothing

else grants you permission to modify or distribute

the Library or its derivative works. These actions

are prohibited by law if you do not accept this

License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing

the Library (or any work based on the Library), you

indicate your acceptance of this License to do so,

and all its terms and conditions for copying, dis-

tributing or modifying the Library or works based

on it.

10. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any

work based on the Library), the recipient automat-

ically receives a license from the original licensor

to copy, distribute, link with or modify the Library

subject to these terms and conditions. You may

not impose any further restrictions on the recipi-

ents' exercise of the rights granted herein. You are

not responsible for enforcing compliance by third

parties with this License.

11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or

allegation of patent infringement or for any other

reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions

are imposed on you (whether by court order,

agreement or otherwise) that contradict the con-

ditions of this License, they do not excuse you

from the conditions of this License. If you cannot

distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obli-

gations under this License and any other perti-

nent obligations, then as a consequence you may

not distribute the Library at all. For example, if a

patent license would not permit royalty-free redis-

tribution of the Library by all those who receive

copies directly or indirectly through you, then the

only way you could satisfy both it and this License

would be to refrain entirely from distribution of

the Library.

If any portion of this section is held invalid or

unenforceable under any particular circumstance,

the balance of the section is intended to apply,

and the section as a whole is intended to apply in

other circumstances.

It is not the purpose of this section to induce you

to infringe any patents or other property right

claims or to contest validity of any such claims;

this section has the sole purpose of protecting the

integrity of the free software distribution system

which is implemented by public license practices.

Many people have made generous contributions

to the wide range of software distributed through

that system in reliance on consistent application

of that system; it is up to the author/donor to

decide if he or she is willing to distribute software

through any other system and a licensee cannot

impose that choice.

This section is intended to make thoroughly clear

what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of

this License.

12. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is

restricted in certain countries either by patents or

by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright

holder who places the Library under this License

may add an explicit geographical distribution lim-

itation excluding those countries, so that distribu-

tion is permitted only in or among countries not

thus excluded. In such case, this License incorpo-

rates the limitation as if written in the body of this

License.

13. The Free Software Foundation may publish

revised and/or new versions of the Lesser General

Public License from time to time. Such new ver-

sions will be similar in spirit to the present version,

but may differ in detail to address new problems

or concerns.

Each version is given a distinguishing version

number. If the Library specifies a version number

of this License which applies to it and "any later

version", you have the option of following the

terms and conditions either of that version or of

any later version published by the Free Software

Foundation. If the Library does not specify a

license version number, you may choose any ver-

sion ever published by the Free Software Founda-

tion.

14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library

into other free programs whose distribution con-

ditions are incompatible with these, write to the

author to ask for permission. For software which is

copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation,

write to the Free Software Foundation; we some-

times make exceptions for this. Our decision will

be guided by the two goals of preserving the free

status of all derivatives of our free software and of

promoting the sharing and reuse of software gen-

erally.

161

Appendix

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / appendix.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

NO WARRANTY

15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF

CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE

LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICA-

BLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN

WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR

OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY "AS IS"

WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER

EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT

LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MER-

CHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR

PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY

AND PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH

YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE,

YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERV-

ICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.

16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICA-

BLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY

MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE

LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU

FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPE-

CIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES

ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE

THE LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO

LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INAC-

CURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD

PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPER-

ATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF SUCH

HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF

THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS

How to Apply These Terms to Your

New Libraries

If you develop a new library, and you want it to be

of the greatest possible use to the public, we rec-

ommend making it free software that everyone

can redistribute and change. You can do so by per-

mitting redistribution under these terms (or, alter-

natively, under the terms of the ordinary General

Public License).

To apply these terms, attach the following notices

to the library. It is safest to attach them to the start

of each source file to most effectively convey the

exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at

least the "copyright" line and a pointer to where

the full notice is found.

You should have received a copy of the GNU

Lesser General Public License along with this

library; if not, write to the Free Software Founda-

tion, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA

02111-1307 USA

Also add information on how to contact you by

electronic and paper mail.

You should also get your employer (if you work as

a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a

"copyright disclaimer" for the library, if necessary.

Here is a sample; alter the names:

<one line to give the library's name and a brief

idea of what it does.>

This library is free software; you can redistribute

it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU

Lesser General Public License as published by

the Free Software Foundation; either version

2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later

version.

This library is distributed in the hope that it will

be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; with-

out even the implied warranty of MERCHANTA-

BILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

See the GNU Lesser General Public License for

more details.

Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright

interest in the library `Frob' (a library for tweak-

ing knobs) written by James Random Hacker.

<signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1990, Ty Coon,

President of Vice

162

Glossary

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / Glossary.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

Glossary

ADSL

Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line

Special form of DSL.

ALG

Application Layer Gateway

NAT control mechanism of a router.

Many routers with integrated NAT use ALG.

ALG lets the data packets in a VoIP connec-

tion pass and adds the public IP address of

the secure private network.

The router's ALG should be deactivated if the

VoIP provider offers a STUN server or an out-

bound proxy.

See also: Firewall, NAT, Outbound proxy,

STUN.

Authentication

Restriction of access to a network/service by

using an ID and password to log in.

Automatic ringback

See Ringback when the number is busy.

Block dialling

Enter the complete phone number, and cor-

rect it if necessary. Then pick up the receiver

or press the speaker key to dial the phone

number.

Broadband Internet access

See DSL.

Call divert

= CD

Automatic diversion (CD) of a call to a differ-

ent telephone number. There are three kinds

of call divert:

– CDU, Call Divert Unconditional

– CDB, Call Divert Busy

– CDNR, Call Divert No Reply

Call swapping

Call swapping allows you to switch between

two callers or between a conference and an

individual caller without allowing the wait-

ing caller to listen to the call.

Call waiting

= CW

Network provider feature. A beep during a

call indicates that another caller is waiting.

You can accept or reject the second call.

You can activate/deactivate the feature.

Client

Application that requests a service from a

server.

Codec

Coder/decoder

Codec is a procedure that digitalises and

compresses analogue voice before it is sent

via the Internet, and decodes – i.e., translates

into analogue voice – digital data when

voice packets are received. There are differ-

ent codecs, with differing degrees of com-

pression, for instance.

Both parties involved in the telephone con-

nection (caller/sender and recipient) must

use the same codec. This is negotiated

between the sender and the recipient when

establishing a connection.

The choice of codec is a compromise

between voice quality, transmission speed

and the necessary bandwidth. A high level

of compression, for example, means that the

bandwidth required for each voice connec-

tion is low. However, it also means that the

time needed to compress/decompress the

data is greater, which increases execution

time for data in the network and thus

impairs voice quality. The time required

increases the delay between the sender

speaking and the recipient hearing what has

been said.

163

Glossary

Gigaset DX800A all in one / USA EN / A31008-xxxxx-xxxx-x-xxxx / Glossary.fm / 24.05.11

Version 4, 16.09.2005

COLP/COLR

Connected Line Identification Presentation/

Restriction

Feature provided by a VoIP connection for

outgoing calls.

COLP displays the phone number accepting

the call on the calling party's display unit.

The number of the party accepting the call is

different to the dialled number, e.g., if the

call is diverted or transferred.

The called party can use COLR (Connected

Line Identification Restriction) to prevent

the number from appearing on the calling

party's display.

Consultation call

You are on a call. With a consultation call,

you interrupt the conversation briefly to

establish a second connection to another

participant. If you end the connection to this

participant immediately, then this was a

consultation call. If you switch between

the first and second participant, it is called

Call swapping.

DHCP

Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol

Internet protocol that handles the automatic

assignment of IP addresses to Network

subscribers. The protocol is made available

in the network by a server. A DHCP server

can, for example, be a router.

The phone contains a DHCP client. A router

that contains a DHCP server can assign the IP

addresses for the phone automatically from

a defined address block. The dynamic

assignment means that several Network

subscribers can share one IP address,

although they use it alternately and not

simultaneously.

With some routers you can specify that the

IP address for the phone is never changed.

Display name

VoIP provider feature. You can specify any

name that is to be shown to the other party

during a call instead of your phone number.

DMZ (Demilitarised Zone)

DMZ describes a part of a network that is

outside the firewall.

A DMZ is set up, as it were, between a net-

work you want to protect (e.g., a LAN) and a

non-secure network (e.g., the Internet).

A DMZ permits unrestricted access from the

Internet to only one or a few network com-

ponents, while the other network compo-

nents remain secure behind the firewall.

DNS

Domain Name System

Hierarchical system that permits the assign-

ment of IP addresses to Domain names that

are easier to memorise. This assignment has

to be managed by a local DNS server in each

(W)LAN. The local DNS server determines

the IP address, if necessary by enquiring

about superordinate DNS servers and other

local DNS servers on the Internet.

You can specify the IP address of the pri-

mary/secondary DNS server.

Gigaset Communications DX800A DECT Basestation with Bluetooth User Manual Saturn

Gigaset Communications GmbH DECT Basestation with Bluetooth Saturn

User Manual EN

Navigation menu

Namespaces

Views

Navigation